Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | //===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===// |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2 | // |
John Criswell | b576c94 | 2003-10-20 19:43:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3 | // The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure |
| 4 | // |
Chris Lattner | 4ee451d | 2007-12-29 20:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 5 | // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source |
| 6 | // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 7 | // |
John Criswell | b576c94 | 2003-10-20 19:43:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 8 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 9 | // |
Chris Lattner | bb190ac | 2002-10-08 21:36:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 10 | // Peephole optimize the CFG. |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 11 | // |
| 12 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
| 13 | |
Chris Lattner | 218a822 | 2004-06-20 01:13:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 14 | #define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg" |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 15 | #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h" |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 16 | #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h" |
| 17 | #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" |
| 18 | #include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h" |
| 19 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" |
| 20 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" |
| 21 | #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h" |
| 22 | #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h" |
Chandler Carruth | be04929 | 2013-01-07 03:08:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 23 | #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h" |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 24 | #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h" |
Chandler Carruth | 0b8c9a8 | 2013-01-02 11:36:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 25 | #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h" |
| 26 | #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" |
| 27 | #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" |
| 28 | #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h" |
| 29 | #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h" |
| 30 | #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h" |
| 31 | #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h" |
| 32 | #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h" |
| 33 | #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h" |
| 34 | #include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h" |
| 35 | #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" |
| 36 | #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h" |
| 37 | #include "llvm/IR/Type.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 38 | #include "llvm/Support/CFG.h" |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 39 | #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h" |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 40 | #include "llvm/Support/ConstantRange.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 41 | #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h" |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 42 | #include "llvm/Support/NoFolder.h" |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 43 | #include "llvm/Support/PatternMatch.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 44 | #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" |
Chandler Carruth | 06cb8ed | 2012-06-29 12:38:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 45 | #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h" |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 46 | #include <algorithm> |
Chris Lattner | 698f96f | 2004-10-18 04:07:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 47 | #include <map> |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 48 | #include <set> |
Chris Lattner | f7703df | 2004-01-09 06:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 49 | using namespace llvm; |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 50 | using namespace PatternMatch; |
Brian Gaeke | d0fde30 | 2003-11-11 22:41:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 51 | |
Peter Collingbourne | 57808b3 | 2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 52 | static cl::opt<unsigned> |
| 53 | PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1), |
| 54 | cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 1)")); |
| 55 | |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 56 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 57 | DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), |
| 58 | cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches")); |
| 59 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 60 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 61 | SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), |
| 62 | cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block")); |
| 63 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 64 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 65 | HoistCondStores("simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), |
| 66 | cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store preceeds")); |
| 67 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 68 | STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps"); |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 69 | STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables"); |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 70 | STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block"); |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 71 | STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions"); |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 72 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 73 | namespace { |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 74 | /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch. |
| 75 | struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase { |
| 76 | ConstantInt *Value; |
| 77 | BasicBlock *Dest; |
| 78 | |
| 79 | ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest) |
| 80 | : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {} |
| 81 | |
| 82 | bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const { |
| 83 | // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing. |
| 84 | return Value < RHS.Value; |
| 85 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 8e13ded | 2012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 86 | |
| 87 | bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 88 | }; |
| 89 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 90 | class SimplifyCFGOpt { |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 91 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI; |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 92 | const DataLayout *const TD; |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 93 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 94 | Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI); |
| 95 | BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 96 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 97 | bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 98 | BasicBlock *Pred, |
| 99 | IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 100 | bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 101 | IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 102 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 103 | bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Bill Wendling | aa5abe8 | 2012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 104 | bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 105 | bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI); |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 106 | bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 107 | bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI); |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 108 | bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder); |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 109 | bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 110 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 111 | public: |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 112 | SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout *TD) |
| 113 | : TTI(TTI), TD(TD) {} |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 114 | bool run(BasicBlock *BB); |
| 115 | }; |
| 116 | } |
| 117 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 118 | /// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two |
| 119 | /// terminator instructions together. |
| 120 | /// |
| 121 | static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) { |
| 122 | if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self! |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 123 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 124 | // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common |
| 125 | // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has |
| 126 | // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks. |
| 127 | BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent(); |
| 128 | BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | c995123 | 2007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 129 | SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 130 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 131 | for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I) |
| 132 | if (SI1Succs.count(*I)) |
| 133 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin(); |
| 134 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 135 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 136 | if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != |
| 137 | PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) |
| 138 | return false; |
| 139 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 140 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 141 | return true; |
| 142 | } |
| 143 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 144 | /// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable |
| 145 | /// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an |
| 146 | /// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common |
| 147 | /// successors. |
| 148 | /// |
| 149 | static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, |
| 150 | BranchInst *SI2, |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 151 | Instruction *Cond, |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 152 | SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) { |
| 153 | if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self! |
| 154 | assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional()); |
| 155 | |
| 156 | // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 157 | // common successors: |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 158 | // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch; |
| 159 | // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch; |
| 160 | // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands. |
| 161 | CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition()); |
| 162 | if (!Ci2) return false; |
| 163 | if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) && |
| 164 | Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) && |
| 165 | !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) && |
| 166 | Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0))) |
| 167 | return false; |
| 168 | |
| 169 | BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent(); |
| 170 | BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent(); |
| 171 | SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB)); |
| 172 | for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I) |
| 173 | if (SI1Succs.count(*I)) |
| 174 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin(); |
| 175 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 176 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 177 | if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond || |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 178 | !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))) |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 179 | return false; |
| 180 | PhiNodes.push_back(PN); |
| 181 | } |
| 182 | return true; |
| 183 | } |
| 184 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 185 | /// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will |
| 186 | /// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be |
| 187 | /// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from |
| 188 | /// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ. |
| 189 | static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred, |
| 190 | BasicBlock *ExistPred) { |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 191 | if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 192 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 193 | PHINode *PN; |
| 194 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); |
| 195 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I) |
| 196 | PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred); |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 197 | } |
| 198 | |
Chris Lattner | 7e66348 | 2005-08-03 00:11:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 199 | |
Chris Lattner | 73c50a6 | 2010-12-14 07:00:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 200 | /// GetIfCondition - Given a basic block (BB) with two predecessors (and at |
| 201 | /// least one PHI node in it), check to see if the merge at this block is due |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 202 | /// to an "if condition". If so, return the boolean condition that determines |
| 203 | /// which entry into BB will be taken. Also, return by references the block |
| 204 | /// that will be entered from if the condition is true, and the block that will |
| 205 | /// be entered if the condition is false. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 206 | /// |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 207 | /// This does no checking to see if the true/false blocks have large or unsavory |
| 208 | /// instructions in them. |
Chris Lattner | 73c50a6 | 2010-12-14 07:00:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 209 | static Value *GetIfCondition(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *&IfTrue, |
| 210 | BasicBlock *&IfFalse) { |
| 211 | PHINode *SomePHI = cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()); |
| 212 | assert(SomePHI->getNumIncomingValues() == 2 && |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 213 | "Function can only handle blocks with 2 predecessors!"); |
Chris Lattner | 73c50a6 | 2010-12-14 07:00:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 214 | BasicBlock *Pred1 = SomePHI->getIncomingBlock(0); |
| 215 | BasicBlock *Pred2 = SomePHI->getIncomingBlock(1); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 216 | |
| 217 | // We can only handle branches. Other control flow will be lowered to |
| 218 | // branches if possible anyway. |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 219 | BranchInst *Pred1Br = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred1->getTerminator()); |
| 220 | BranchInst *Pred2Br = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred2->getTerminator()); |
| 221 | if (Pred1Br == 0 || Pred2Br == 0) |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 222 | return 0; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 223 | |
| 224 | // Eliminate code duplication by ensuring that Pred1Br is conditional if |
| 225 | // either are. |
| 226 | if (Pred2Br->isConditional()) { |
| 227 | // If both branches are conditional, we don't have an "if statement". In |
| 228 | // reality, we could transform this case, but since the condition will be |
| 229 | // required anyway, we stand no chance of eliminating it, so the xform is |
| 230 | // probably not profitable. |
| 231 | if (Pred1Br->isConditional()) |
| 232 | return 0; |
| 233 | |
| 234 | std::swap(Pred1, Pred2); |
| 235 | std::swap(Pred1Br, Pred2Br); |
| 236 | } |
| 237 | |
| 238 | if (Pred1Br->isConditional()) { |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 239 | // The only thing we have to watch out for here is to make sure that Pred2 |
| 240 | // doesn't have incoming edges from other blocks. If it does, the condition |
| 241 | // doesn't dominate BB. |
| 242 | if (Pred2->getSinglePredecessor() == 0) |
| 243 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 244 | |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 245 | // If we found a conditional branch predecessor, make sure that it branches |
| 246 | // to BB and Pred2Br. If it doesn't, this isn't an "if statement". |
| 247 | if (Pred1Br->getSuccessor(0) == BB && |
| 248 | Pred1Br->getSuccessor(1) == Pred2) { |
| 249 | IfTrue = Pred1; |
| 250 | IfFalse = Pred2; |
| 251 | } else if (Pred1Br->getSuccessor(0) == Pred2 && |
| 252 | Pred1Br->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
| 253 | IfTrue = Pred2; |
| 254 | IfFalse = Pred1; |
| 255 | } else { |
| 256 | // We know that one arm of the conditional goes to BB, so the other must |
| 257 | // go somewhere unrelated, and this must not be an "if statement". |
| 258 | return 0; |
| 259 | } |
| 260 | |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 261 | return Pred1Br->getCondition(); |
| 262 | } |
| 263 | |
| 264 | // Ok, if we got here, both predecessors end with an unconditional branch to |
| 265 | // BB. Don't panic! If both blocks only have a single (identical) |
| 266 | // predecessor, and THAT is a conditional branch, then we're all ok! |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 267 | BasicBlock *CommonPred = Pred1->getSinglePredecessor(); |
| 268 | if (CommonPred == 0 || CommonPred != Pred2->getSinglePredecessor()) |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 269 | return 0; |
| 270 | |
| 271 | // Otherwise, if this is a conditional branch, then we can use it! |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 272 | BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CommonPred->getTerminator()); |
| 273 | if (BI == 0) return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 274 | |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 275 | assert(BI->isConditional() && "Two successors but not conditional?"); |
| 276 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == Pred1) { |
| 277 | IfTrue = Pred1; |
| 278 | IfFalse = Pred2; |
| 279 | } else { |
| 280 | IfTrue = Pred2; |
| 281 | IfFalse = Pred1; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 282 | } |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 283 | return BI->getCondition(); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 284 | } |
| 285 | |
David Majnemer | f7dad78 | 2013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 286 | /// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 287 | /// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. 1 means |
| 288 | /// cheap, 2 means less cheap, and UINT_MAX means prohibitively expensive. |
| 289 | static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I) { |
| 290 | assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && |
| 291 | "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!"); |
| 292 | switch (Operator::getOpcode(I)) { |
| 293 | default: |
| 294 | // In doubt, be conservative. |
| 295 | return UINT_MAX; |
| 296 | case Instruction::GetElementPtr: |
| 297 | // GEPs are cheap if all indices are constant. |
| 298 | if (!cast<GEPOperator>(I)->hasAllConstantIndices()) |
| 299 | return UINT_MAX; |
| 300 | return 1; |
| 301 | case Instruction::Load: |
| 302 | case Instruction::Add: |
| 303 | case Instruction::Sub: |
| 304 | case Instruction::And: |
| 305 | case Instruction::Or: |
| 306 | case Instruction::Xor: |
| 307 | case Instruction::Shl: |
| 308 | case Instruction::LShr: |
| 309 | case Instruction::AShr: |
| 310 | case Instruction::ICmp: |
| 311 | case Instruction::Trunc: |
| 312 | case Instruction::ZExt: |
| 313 | case Instruction::SExt: |
| 314 | return 1; // These are all cheap. |
| 315 | |
| 316 | case Instruction::Call: |
| 317 | case Instruction::Select: |
| 318 | return 2; |
| 319 | } |
| 320 | } |
| 321 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 322 | /// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as |
| 323 | /// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We |
| 324 | /// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case |
| 325 | /// which works well enough for us. |
| 326 | /// |
| 327 | /// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 328 | /// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands |
| 329 | /// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and |
| 330 | /// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the |
| 331 | /// set and true is returned. |
| 332 | /// |
| 333 | /// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for |
| 334 | /// Select whose cost is 2. |
| 335 | /// |
| 336 | /// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of |
| 337 | /// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than |
| 338 | /// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined. |
Chris Lattner | 9c07866 | 2004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 339 | static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB, |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 340 | SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> *AggressiveInsts, |
| 341 | unsigned &CostRemaining) { |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 342 | Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); |
Chris Lattner | b74b181 | 2006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 343 | if (!I) { |
| 344 | // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs |
| 345 | // can be executed unconditionally. |
| 346 | if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V)) |
| 347 | if (C->canTrap()) |
| 348 | return false; |
| 349 | return true; |
| 350 | } |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 351 | BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 352 | |
Chris Lattner | da895d6 | 2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 353 | // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 354 | // the bottom of this block. |
| 355 | if (PBB == BB) return false; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 356 | |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 357 | // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional |
| 358 | // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 359 | // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region. |
| 360 | BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator()); |
| 361 | if (BI == 0 || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB) |
| 362 | return true; |
Eli Friedman | 0b79a77 | 2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 363 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 364 | // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider |
| 365 | // instructions in the 'if region'. |
| 366 | if (AggressiveInsts == 0) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 367 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 368 | // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again. |
| 369 | if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true; |
| 370 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 371 | // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to |
| 372 | // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it |
| 373 | // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out. |
Dan Gohman | f042660 | 2011-12-14 23:49:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 374 | if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I)) |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 375 | return false; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 376 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 377 | unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I); |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 378 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 379 | if (Cost > CostRemaining) |
| 380 | return false; |
| 381 | |
| 382 | CostRemaining -= Cost; |
| 383 | |
| 384 | // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do |
| 385 | // not take us over the cost threshold. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 386 | for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 387 | if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining)) |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 388 | return false; |
| 389 | // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction. |
| 390 | AggressiveInsts->insert(I); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 391 | return true; |
| 392 | } |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 393 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 394 | /// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr |
| 395 | /// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 396 | static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 397 | // Normal constant int. |
| 398 | ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V); |
Duncan Sands | 1df9859 | 2010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 399 | if (CI || !TD || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy()) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 400 | return CI; |
| 401 | |
| 402 | // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized |
| 403 | // ConstantInt if possible. |
Duncan Sands | 7ed4f94 | 2012-10-29 17:31:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 404 | IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(TD->getIntPtrType(V->getType())); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 405 | |
| 406 | // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*). |
| 407 | if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V)) |
| 408 | return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0); |
| 409 | |
| 410 | // IntToPtr const int. |
| 411 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V)) |
| 412 | if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr) |
| 413 | if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) { |
| 414 | // The constant is very likely to have the right type already. |
| 415 | if (CI->getType() == PtrTy) |
| 416 | return CI; |
| 417 | else |
| 418 | return cast<ConstantInt> |
| 419 | (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false)); |
| 420 | } |
| 421 | return 0; |
| 422 | } |
| 423 | |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 424 | /// GatherConstantCompares - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together |
| 425 | /// collection of icmp eq/ne instructions that compare a value against a |
| 426 | /// constant, return the value being compared, and stick the constant into the |
| 427 | /// Values vector. |
Chris Lattner | 28acc13 | 2010-12-13 03:30:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 428 | static Value * |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 429 | GatherConstantCompares(Value *V, std::vector<ConstantInt*> &Vals, Value *&Extra, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 430 | const DataLayout *TD, bool isEQ, unsigned &UsedICmps) { |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 431 | Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); |
| 432 | if (I == 0) return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 433 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 434 | // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases. |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 435 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 436 | if (ConstantInt *C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), TD)) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 437 | Value *RHSVal; |
| 438 | ConstantInt *RHSC; |
| 439 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 440 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 441 | // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x |
| 442 | // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares. |
| 443 | if (match(ICI->getOperand(0), |
| 444 | m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) { |
| 445 | APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue(); |
| 446 | if (Not.isPowerOf2()) { |
| 447 | Vals.push_back(C); |
| 448 | Vals.push_back( |
| 449 | ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not)); |
| 450 | UsedICmps++; |
| 451 | return RHSVal; |
| 452 | } |
| 453 | } |
| 454 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 455 | UsedICmps++; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 456 | Vals.push_back(C); |
| 457 | return I->getOperand(0); |
| 458 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 459 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 460 | // If we have "x ult 3" comparison, for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to |
| 461 | // the set. |
| 462 | ConstantRange Span = |
Chris Lattner | a37029c | 2010-12-18 20:22:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 463 | ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 464 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 465 | // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range |
| 466 | // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine. |
| 467 | bool hasAdd = |
| 468 | match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC))); |
| 469 | if (hasAdd) |
| 470 | Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue()); |
| 471 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 472 | // If this is an and/!= check then we want to optimize "x ugt 2" into |
| 473 | // x != 0 && x != 1. |
| 474 | if (!isEQ) |
| 475 | Span = Span.inverse(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 476 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 477 | // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch. |
Nick Lewycky | f460bf8 | 2012-01-19 18:19:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 478 | if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 479 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 480 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 481 | for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp) |
| 482 | Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(V->getContext(), Tmp)); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 483 | UsedICmps++; |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 484 | return hasAdd ? RHSVal : I->getOperand(0); |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 485 | } |
Chris Lattner | 662269d | 2010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 486 | return 0; |
| 487 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 488 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 489 | // Otherwise, we can only handle an | or &, depending on isEQ. |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 490 | if (I->getOpcode() != (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) |
Chris Lattner | 662269d | 2010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 491 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 492 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 493 | unsigned NumValsBeforeLHS = Vals.size(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 494 | unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeLHS = UsedICmps; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 495 | if (Value *LHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(0), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 496 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) { |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 497 | unsigned NumVals = Vals.size(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 498 | unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeRHS = UsedICmps; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 499 | if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 500 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) { |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 501 | if (LHS == RHS) |
| 502 | return LHS; |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 503 | Vals.resize(NumVals); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 504 | UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeRHS; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 505 | } |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 506 | |
| 507 | // The RHS of the or/and can't be folded in and we haven't used "Extra" yet, |
| 508 | // set it and return success. |
| 509 | if (Extra == 0 || Extra == I->getOperand(1)) { |
| 510 | Extra = I->getOperand(1); |
| 511 | return LHS; |
| 512 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 513 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 514 | Vals.resize(NumValsBeforeLHS); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 515 | UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeLHS; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 516 | return 0; |
Anton Korobeynikov | 07e6e56 | 2008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 517 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 518 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 519 | // If the LHS can't be folded in, but Extra is available and RHS can, try to |
| 520 | // use LHS as Extra. |
| 521 | if (Extra == 0 || Extra == I->getOperand(0)) { |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 522 | Value *OldExtra = Extra; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 523 | Extra = I->getOperand(0); |
| 524 | if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 525 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 526 | return RHS; |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 527 | assert(Vals.size() == NumValsBeforeLHS); |
| 528 | Extra = OldExtra; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 529 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 530 | |
Chris Lattner | 0d56008 | 2004-02-24 05:38:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 531 | return 0; |
| 532 | } |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 533 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 534 | static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 535 | Instruction *Cond = 0; |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 536 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
| 537 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition()); |
| 538 | } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 539 | if (BI->isConditional()) |
| 540 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 541 | } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) { |
| 542 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress()); |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 543 | } |
| 544 | |
| 545 | TI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 546 | if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond); |
| 547 | } |
| 548 | |
Chris Lattner | 9fd4955 | 2008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 549 | /// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks |
| 550 | /// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 551 | Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) { |
| 552 | Value *CV = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 4bebf08 | 2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 553 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
| 554 | // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their |
| 555 | // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 556 | if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()), |
| 557 | pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128) |
| 558 | CV = SI->getCondition(); |
| 559 | } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 560 | if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse()) |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 561 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) |
David Majnemer | 404fa72 | 2013-06-03 20:39:50 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 562 | if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), TD)) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 563 | CV = ICI->getOperand(0); |
| 564 | |
| 565 | // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast. |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 566 | if (TD && CV && CV->getType() == TD->getIntPtrType(CV->getContext())) |
| 567 | if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 568 | CV = PTII->getOperand(0); |
| 569 | return CV; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 570 | } |
| 571 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 572 | /// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction, |
| 573 | /// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 574 | BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt:: |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 575 | GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 576 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> |
| 577 | &Cases) { |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 578 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 579 | Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases()); |
| 580 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i) |
| 581 | Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), |
| 582 | i.getCaseSuccessor())); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 583 | return SI->getDefaultDest(); |
| 584 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 585 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 586 | BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI); |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 587 | ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 588 | BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE); |
| 589 | Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), |
| 590 | TD), |
| 591 | Succ)); |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 592 | return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 593 | } |
| 594 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 595 | |
| 596 | /// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries |
| 597 | /// in the list that match the specified block. |
| 598 | static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB, |
| 599 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 8e13ded | 2012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 600 | Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 601 | } |
| 602 | |
| 603 | /// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as |
| 604 | /// well. |
| 605 | static bool |
| 606 | ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1, |
| 607 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) { |
| 608 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2; |
| 609 | |
| 610 | // Make V1 be smaller than V2. |
| 611 | if (V1->size() > V2->size()) |
| 612 | std::swap(V1, V2); |
| 613 | |
| 614 | if (V1->size() == 0) return false; |
| 615 | if (V1->size() == 1) { |
| 616 | // Just scan V2. |
| 617 | ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value; |
| 618 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 619 | if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value) |
| 620 | return true; |
| 621 | } |
| 622 | |
| 623 | // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element. |
| 624 | array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end()); |
| 625 | array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end()); |
| 626 | unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size(); |
| 627 | while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) { |
| 628 | if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value) |
| 629 | return true; |
| 630 | if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value) |
| 631 | ++i1; |
| 632 | else |
| 633 | ++i2; |
| 634 | } |
| 635 | return false; |
| 636 | } |
| 637 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 638 | /// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a |
| 639 | /// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single |
| 640 | /// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value |
| 641 | /// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the |
| 642 | /// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited |
| 643 | /// form of jump threading. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 644 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt:: |
| 645 | SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 646 | BasicBlock *Pred, |
| 647 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 648 | Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator()); |
| 649 | if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor. |
| 650 | |
| 651 | Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); |
| 652 | assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!"); |
| 653 | if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates. |
| 654 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 655 | // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how |
| 656 | // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it. |
| 657 | |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 658 | // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 659 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 660 | BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), |
| 661 | PredCases); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 662 | EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 663 | |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 664 | // Find information about how control leaves this block. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 665 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 666 | BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 667 | EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases. |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 668 | |
| 669 | // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially |
| 670 | // simplify TI based on this knowledge. |
| 671 | if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) { |
| 672 | // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in |
| 673 | // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we |
| 674 | // can simplify TI. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 675 | if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases)) |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 676 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 677 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 678 | if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 679 | // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a |
| 680 | // uncond br. |
| 681 | assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!"); |
| 682 | // Insert the new branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 683 | Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 684 | (void) NI; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 685 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 686 | // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 687 | ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent()); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 688 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 689 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
| 690 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n"); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 691 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 692 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI); |
| 693 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 694 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 695 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 696 | SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI); |
| 697 | // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 698 | SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases; |
| 699 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 700 | DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 701 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 702 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 703 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 704 | |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 705 | // Collect branch weights into a vector. |
| 706 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights; |
| 707 | MDNode* MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 708 | bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases()); |
| 709 | if (HasWeight) |
| 710 | for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e; |
| 711 | ++MD_i) { |
| 712 | ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i)); |
| 713 | assert(CI); |
| 714 | Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue()); |
| 715 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 716 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) { |
| 717 | --i; |
| 718 | if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) { |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 719 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 720 | std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back()); |
| 721 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 722 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 723 | i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent()); |
| 724 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 725 | } |
| 726 | } |
Manman Ren | d61d1eb | 2012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 727 | if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 728 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 729 | MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()). |
| 730 | createBranchWeights(Weights)); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 731 | |
| 732 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n"); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 733 | return true; |
| 734 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 735 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 736 | // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out |
| 737 | // which value (or set of values) this is. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 738 | ConstantInt *TIV = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 739 | BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent(); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 740 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 741 | if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) { |
| 742 | if (TIV != 0) |
| 743 | return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block. |
| 744 | TIV = PredCases[i].Value; |
| 745 | } |
| 746 | assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?"); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 747 | |
| 748 | // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's |
| 749 | // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 750 | BasicBlock *TheRealDest = 0; |
| 751 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 752 | if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) { |
| 753 | TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest; |
| 754 | break; |
| 755 | } |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 756 | |
| 757 | // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case. |
| 758 | if (TheRealDest == 0) TheRealDest = ThisDef; |
| 759 | |
| 760 | // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges. |
| 761 | BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest; |
| 762 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI) |
| 763 | if (*SI != CheckEdge) |
| 764 | (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB); |
| 765 | else |
| 766 | CheckEdge = 0; |
| 767 | |
| 768 | // Insert the new branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 769 | Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 770 | (void) NI; |
| 771 | |
| 772 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
| 773 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n"); |
| 774 | |
| 775 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI); |
| 776 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 777 | } |
| 778 | |
Dale Johannesen | c81f544 | 2009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 779 | namespace { |
| 780 | /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant |
| 781 | /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for |
| 782 | /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness. |
| 783 | struct ConstantIntOrdering { |
| 784 | bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const { |
| 785 | return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()); |
| 786 | } |
| 787 | }; |
| 788 | } |
Dale Johannesen | a9537cf | 2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 789 | |
Chris Lattner | 6d4d21e | 2010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 790 | static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(const void *P1, const void *P2) { |
Roman Divacky | 5932429 | 2012-09-05 22:26:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 791 | const ConstantInt *LHS = *(const ConstantInt*const*)P1; |
| 792 | const ConstantInt *RHS = *(const ConstantInt*const*)P2; |
Chris Lattner | ba3c815 | 2010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 793 | if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue())) |
| 794 | return 1; |
| 795 | if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue()) |
| 796 | return 0; |
| 797 | return -1; |
Chris Lattner | 6d4d21e | 2010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 798 | } |
| 799 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 800 | static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) { |
| 801 | MDNode* ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 802 | if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0)) |
| 803 | if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0))) |
| 804 | return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights"); |
| 805 | |
| 806 | return false; |
| 807 | } |
| 808 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 809 | /// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front |
| 810 | /// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight |
| 811 | /// metadata. |
| 812 | static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 813 | SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) { |
| 814 | MDNode* MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 815 | assert(MD); |
| 816 | for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) { |
| 817 | ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i)); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 818 | assert(CI); |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 819 | Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 820 | } |
| 821 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 822 | // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case, |
| 823 | // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the |
| 824 | // default weight to be the first entry. |
| 825 | if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 826 | assert(Weights.size() == 2); |
| 827 | ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 828 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 829 | std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 830 | } |
| 831 | } |
| 832 | |
| 833 | /// Sees if any of the weights are too big for a uint32_t, and halves all the |
| 834 | /// weights if any are. |
| 835 | static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) { |
| 836 | bool Halve = false; |
| 837 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < Weights.size(); ++i) |
| 838 | if (Weights[i] > UINT_MAX) { |
| 839 | Halve = true; |
| 840 | break; |
| 841 | } |
| 842 | |
| 843 | if (! Halve) |
| 844 | return; |
| 845 | |
| 846 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < Weights.size(); ++i) |
| 847 | Weights[i] /= 2; |
| 848 | } |
| 849 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 850 | /// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value |
| 851 | /// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c"). |
| 852 | /// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons |
| 853 | /// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together. |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 854 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 855 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 856 | BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent(); |
| 857 | Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal |
| 858 | assert(CV && "Not a comparison?"); |
| 859 | bool Changed = false; |
| 860 | |
Chris Lattner | 8244243 | 2008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 861 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 862 | while (!Preds.empty()) { |
Dan Gohman | e9d87f4 | 2009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 863 | BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val(); |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 864 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 865 | // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value. |
| 866 | TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator(); |
| 867 | Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal |
| 868 | |
| 869 | if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) { |
| 870 | // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 871 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 872 | BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases); |
| 873 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 874 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 875 | BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases); |
| 876 | |
| 877 | // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in |
| 878 | // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to |
| 879 | // build. |
Chris Lattner | 8244243 | 2008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 880 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 881 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 882 | // Update the branch weight metadata along the way |
| 883 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 884 | bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI); |
| 885 | bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI); |
| 886 | |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 887 | if (PredHasWeights) { |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 888 | GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights); |
Andrew Trick | c2aa003 | 2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 889 | // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here. |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 890 | if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size()) |
| 891 | PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false; |
| 892 | } else if (SuccHasWeights) |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 893 | // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights, |
| 894 | // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of |
| 895 | // successor's weights |
| 896 | Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 897 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 898 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights; |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 899 | if (SuccHasWeights) { |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 900 | GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights); |
Andrew Trick | c2aa003 | 2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 901 | // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here. |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 902 | if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size()) |
| 903 | PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false; |
| 904 | } else if (PredHasWeights) |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 905 | SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 906 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 907 | if (PredDefault == BB) { |
| 908 | // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI |
| 909 | // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 910 | std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled; |
| 911 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 912 | if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB) |
| 913 | PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
| 914 | else { |
| 915 | // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets. |
| 916 | std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 917 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 918 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 919 | // Increase weight for the default case. |
| 920 | Weights[0] += Weights[i+1]; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 921 | std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back()); |
| 922 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 923 | } |
| 924 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 925 | PredCases.pop_back(); |
| 926 | --i; --e; |
| 927 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 928 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 929 | // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building. |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 930 | if (PredDefault != BBDefault) { |
| 931 | PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred); |
| 932 | PredDefault = BBDefault; |
| 933 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault); |
| 934 | } |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 935 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 936 | unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size(); |
| 937 | uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0; |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 938 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 939 | if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && |
| 940 | BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) { |
| 941 | PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]); |
| 942 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest); |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 943 | if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) { |
| 944 | // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case |
| 945 | // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by |
| 946 | // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]). |
| 947 | Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]); |
| 948 | ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1]; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 949 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 950 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 951 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 952 | if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) { |
| 953 | ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0]; |
| 954 | // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight. |
| 955 | for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i) |
| 956 | Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight; |
| 957 | // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]). |
| 958 | Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0]; |
| 959 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 960 | } else { |
| 961 | // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges |
| 962 | // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be |
| 963 | // activated. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 964 | std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled; |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 965 | std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled; |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 966 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 967 | if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) { |
| 968 | PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 969 | |
| 970 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 971 | WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1]; |
| 972 | std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back()); |
| 973 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 974 | } |
| 975 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 976 | std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back()); |
| 977 | PredCases.pop_back(); |
| 978 | --i; --e; |
| 979 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 980 | |
| 981 | // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the |
| 982 | // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 983 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 984 | if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) { |
| 985 | // If this is one we are capable of getting... |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 986 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) |
| 987 | Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 988 | PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]); |
| 989 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest); |
| 990 | PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of |
| 991 | } |
| 992 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 993 | // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle, |
| 994 | // they must go to the default destination of TI. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 995 | for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I = |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 996 | PTIHandled.begin(), |
| 997 | E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 998 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) |
| 999 | Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1000 | PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault)); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1001 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1002 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1003 | } |
| 1004 | |
| 1005 | // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make |
| 1006 | // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these |
| 1007 | // successors. |
| 1008 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1009 | AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB); |
| 1010 | |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1011 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1012 | // Convert pointer to int before we switch. |
Duncan Sands | 1df9859 | 2010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1013 | if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) { |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1014 | assert(TD && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout"); |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1015 | CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, TD->getIntPtrType(CV->getContext()), |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1016 | "magicptr"); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1017 | } |
| 1018 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1019 | // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction. |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1020 | SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, |
| 1021 | PredCases.size()); |
Devang Patel | d80e8ed | 2011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1022 | NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1023 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1024 | NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest); |
Chris Lattner | 13b2f76 | 2005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1025 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1026 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 1027 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 1028 | FitWeights(Weights); |
| 1029 | |
| 1030 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 1031 | |
| 1032 | NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 1033 | MDBuilder(BB->getContext()). |
| 1034 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 1035 | } |
| 1036 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1037 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI); |
Chris Lattner | 13b2f76 | 2005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1038 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1039 | // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must |
| 1040 | // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block |
| 1041 | // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code. |
| 1042 | BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = 0; |
| 1043 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1044 | if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) { |
| 1045 | if (InfLoopBlock == 0) { |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1046 | // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code, |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1047 | // or it won't matter if it's hot. :) |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1048 | InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 1049 | "infloop", BB->getParent()); |
Gabor Greif | 051a950 | 2008-04-06 20:25:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1050 | BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1051 | } |
| 1052 | NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock); |
| 1053 | } |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1054 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1055 | Changed = true; |
| 1056 | } |
| 1057 | } |
| 1058 | return Changed; |
| 1059 | } |
| 1060 | |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1061 | // isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the |
| 1062 | // value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we |
| 1063 | // would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere |
| 1064 | // to put the select in this case. |
| 1065 | static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2, |
| 1066 | Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) { |
| 1067 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1068 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1069 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
| 1070 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
| 1071 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1072 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
| 1073 | if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) { |
| 1074 | return false; |
| 1075 | } |
| 1076 | } |
| 1077 | } |
| 1078 | return true; |
| 1079 | } |
| 1080 | |
Chris Lattner | 6306d07 | 2005-08-03 17:59:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1081 | /// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1082 | /// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The |
| 1083 | /// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. |
Rafael Espindola | 216dde9 | 2011-05-19 02:26:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1084 | static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1085 | // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical |
| 1086 | // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into |
| 1087 | // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As |
| 1088 | // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an |
| 1089 | // identical order. |
| 1090 | BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination. |
| 1091 | BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination |
| 1092 | |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1093 | BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin(); |
| 1094 | BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin(); |
| 1095 | |
| 1096 | Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 949666e | 2011-04-07 17:27:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1097 | // Skip debug info if it is not identical. |
| 1098 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1); |
| 1099 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2); |
| 1100 | if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) { |
| 1101 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1)) |
| 1102 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
| 1103 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) |
| 1104 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
| 1105 | } |
Devang Patel | ae6c95b | 2011-04-07 00:30:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1106 | if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) || |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1107 | (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))) |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1108 | return false; |
| 1109 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1110 | BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1111 | |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1112 | bool Changed = false; |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1113 | do { |
| 1114 | // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a |
| 1115 | // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI. |
| 1116 | if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1)) |
| 1117 | goto HoistTerminator; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1118 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1119 | // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch, |
| 1120 | // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove |
| 1121 | // the now redundant second instruction. |
| 1122 | BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1); |
| 1123 | if (!I2->use_empty()) |
| 1124 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
Dan Gohman | 58cfa3b | 2009-08-25 22:11:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1125 | I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1126 | I2->eraseFromParent(); |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1127 | Changed = true; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1128 | |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1129 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1130 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 949666e | 2011-04-07 17:27:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1131 | // Skip debug info if it is not identical. |
| 1132 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1); |
| 1133 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2); |
| 1134 | if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) { |
| 1135 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1)) |
| 1136 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
| 1137 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) |
| 1138 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
| 1139 | } |
Devang Patel | ae6c95b | 2011-04-07 00:30:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1140 | } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2)); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1141 | |
| 1142 | return true; |
| 1143 | |
| 1144 | HoistTerminator: |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1145 | // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke. |
| 1146 | if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)) |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1147 | return Changed; |
| 1148 | |
| 1149 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1150 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1151 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
| 1152 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
| 1153 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1154 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
| 1155 | if (BB1V == BB2V) |
| 1156 | continue; |
| 1157 | |
| 1158 | if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V)) |
| 1159 | return Changed; |
| 1160 | if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V)) |
| 1161 | return Changed; |
| 1162 | } |
| 1163 | } |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1164 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1165 | // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator. |
Nick Lewycky | 6776064 | 2009-09-27 07:38:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1166 | Instruction *NT = I1->clone(); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1167 | BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT); |
Benjamin Kramer | f012705 | 2010-01-05 13:12:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1168 | if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1169 | I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT); |
| 1170 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT); |
Chris Lattner | 86cc423 | 2007-02-11 01:37:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1171 | NT->takeName(I1); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1172 | } |
| 1173 | |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1174 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1175 | // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing. |
| 1176 | // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in |
| 1177 | // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI |
| 1178 | // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result. |
| 1179 | std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects; |
| 1180 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1181 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1182 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
Chris Lattner | 0f535c6 | 2004-11-30 07:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1183 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1184 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1185 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1186 | if (BB1V == BB2V) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1187 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1188 | // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT |
| 1189 | // that determines the right value. |
| 1190 | SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)]; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1191 | if (SI == 0) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1192 | SI = cast<SelectInst> |
| 1193 | (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V, |
| 1194 | BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName())); |
| 1195 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1196 | // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2 |
| 1197 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1198 | if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2) |
| 1199 | PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1200 | } |
| 1201 | } |
| 1202 | |
| 1203 | // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors. |
| 1204 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) |
| 1205 | AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1); |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1206 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1207 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1208 | return true; |
| 1209 | } |
| 1210 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1211 | /// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd, |
| 1212 | /// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor |
| 1213 | /// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code |
| 1214 | /// in the two predecessors to BBEnd. |
| 1215 | static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) { |
| 1216 | assert(BI1->isUnconditional()); |
| 1217 | BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent(); |
| 1218 | BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 | // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with |
| 1221 | // an unconditional branch. |
Benjamin Kramer | fdb9606 | 2012-09-30 21:03:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1222 | pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd); |
| 1223 | BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++; |
| 1224 | if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor. |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1225 | return false; |
Benjamin Kramer | fdb9606 | 2012-09-30 21:03:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1226 | BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++; |
| 1227 | if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors. |
| 1228 | return false; |
| 1229 | BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0; |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1230 | BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator()); |
| 1231 | if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional()) |
| 1232 | return false; |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 | // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd. |
| 1235 | std::map<Value*, std::pair<Value*, PHINode*> > MapValueFromBB1ToBB2; |
| 1236 | Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = 0; |
| 1237 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); |
| 1238 | I != E; ++I) { |
| 1239 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { |
| 1240 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1241 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1242 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[BB1V] = std::make_pair(BB2V, PN); |
| 1243 | } else { |
| 1244 | FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I; |
| 1245 | break; |
| 1246 | } |
| 1247 | } |
| 1248 | if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd) |
| 1249 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1250 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1251 | |
| 1252 | // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical |
| 1253 | // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical |
| 1254 | // instructions in an identical order. |
| 1255 | BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(), |
| 1256 | RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(), RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(), |
| 1257 | RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1258 | // Skip debug info. |
| 1259 | while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1; |
| 1260 | if (RI1 == RE1) |
| 1261 | return false; |
| 1262 | while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2; |
| 1263 | if (RI2 == RE2) |
| 1264 | return false; |
| 1265 | // Skip the unconditional branches. |
| 1266 | ++RI1; |
| 1267 | ++RI2; |
| 1268 | |
| 1269 | bool Changed = false; |
| 1270 | while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) { |
| 1271 | // Skip debug info. |
| 1272 | while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1; |
| 1273 | if (RI1 == RE1) |
| 1274 | return Changed; |
| 1275 | while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2; |
| 1276 | if (RI2 == RE2) |
| 1277 | return Changed; |
| 1278 | |
| 1279 | Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2; |
| 1280 | // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they |
| 1281 | // perform the same operation. |
| 1282 | // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc. |
| 1283 | if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) || |
| 1284 | isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) || |
| 1285 | isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) || |
| 1286 | isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) || |
| 1287 | I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() || |
| 1288 | I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || |
| 1289 | !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() || |
| 1290 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1) == MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() || |
| 1291 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].first != I2) |
| 1292 | return Changed; |
| 1293 | |
| 1294 | // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst. |
| 1295 | ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2); |
| 1296 | bool SwapOpnds = false; |
| 1297 | if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 && |
| 1298 | ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) && |
| 1299 | ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) && |
| 1300 | (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) || |
| 1301 | ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) { |
| 1302 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1303 | SwapOpnds = true; |
| 1304 | } |
| 1305 | if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) { |
| 1306 | if (SwapOpnds) |
| 1307 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1308 | return Changed; |
| 1309 | } |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 | // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated |
| 1312 | // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is |
| 1313 | // a single pair of different operands. |
| 1314 | Value *DifferentOp1 = 0, *DifferentOp2 = 0; |
| 1315 | unsigned Op1Idx = 0; |
| 1316 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 1317 | if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I)) |
| 1318 | continue; |
| 1319 | // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or |
| 1320 | // the different operand is already in MapValueFromBB1ToBB2. |
| 1321 | // Early exit if we need a PHI node to replace a constant. |
| 1322 | if (DifferentOp1 || |
| 1323 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1->getOperand(I)) != |
| 1324 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() || |
| 1325 | isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) || |
| 1326 | isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) { |
| 1327 | // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping. |
| 1328 | if (SwapOpnds) |
| 1329 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1330 | return Changed; |
| 1331 | } |
| 1332 | DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I); |
| 1333 | Op1Idx = I; |
| 1334 | DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I); |
| 1335 | } |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 | // We insert the pair of different operands to MapValueFromBB1ToBB2 and |
| 1338 | // remove (I1, I2) from MapValueFromBB1ToBB2. |
| 1339 | if (DifferentOp1) { |
| 1340 | PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2, |
| 1341 | DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", |
| 1342 | BBEnd->begin()); |
| 1343 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[DifferentOp1] = std::make_pair(DifferentOp2, NewPN); |
| 1344 | // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1. |
| 1345 | I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN); |
| 1346 | NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1); |
| 1347 | NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2); |
| 1348 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";); |
| 1349 | } |
| 1350 | PHINode *OldPN = MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].second; |
| 1351 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.erase(I1); |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n";); |
| 1354 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n";); |
| 1355 | // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first |
| 1356 | // instruction in the basic block down. |
| 1357 | bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin()); |
| 1358 | // Sink the instruction. |
| 1359 | BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1); |
| 1360 | if (!OldPN->use_empty()) |
| 1361 | OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
| 1362 | OldPN->eraseFromParent(); |
| 1363 | |
| 1364 | if (!I2->use_empty()) |
| 1365 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
| 1366 | I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2); |
| 1367 | I2->eraseFromParent(); |
| 1368 | |
| 1369 | if (UpdateRE1) |
| 1370 | RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1371 | if (UpdateRE2) |
| 1372 | RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1373 | FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1; |
| 1374 | NumSinkCommons++; |
| 1375 | Changed = true; |
| 1376 | } |
| 1377 | return Changed; |
| 1378 | } |
| 1379 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1380 | /// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a |
| 1381 | /// conditional block. |
| 1382 | /// |
| 1383 | /// We are looking for code like the following: |
| 1384 | /// BrBB: |
| 1385 | /// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1386 | /// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory |
| 1387 | /// ... // function). |
| 1388 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1389 | /// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB |
| 1390 | /// ThenBB: |
| 1391 | /// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1392 | /// br label EndBB |
| 1393 | /// EndBB: |
| 1394 | /// ... |
| 1395 | /// We are going to transform this into: |
| 1396 | /// BrBB: |
| 1397 | /// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1398 | /// ... // |
| 1399 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1400 | /// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5 |
| 1401 | /// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1402 | /// ... |
| 1403 | /// |
| 1404 | /// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be |
| 1405 | /// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise. |
Benjamin Kramer | 603100d | 2013-05-23 16:09:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1406 | static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB, |
| 1407 | BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) { |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1408 | StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I); |
| 1409 | if (!StoreToHoist) |
| 1410 | return 0; |
| 1411 | |
| 1412 | // Volatile or atomic. |
| 1413 | if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple()) |
| 1414 | return 0; |
| 1415 | |
| 1416 | Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand(); |
| 1417 | |
| 1418 | // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB. |
| 1419 | unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10; |
| 1420 | for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(), |
| 1421 | RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) { |
| 1422 | Instruction *CurI = &*RI; |
| 1423 | |
| 1424 | // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free(). |
| 1425 | if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI)) |
| 1426 | return 0; |
| 1427 | |
| 1428 | StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI); |
| 1429 | // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location. |
| 1430 | if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr) |
| 1431 | // Found the previous store, return its value operand. |
| 1432 | return SI->getValueOperand(); |
| 1433 | else if (SI) |
| 1434 | return 0; // Unknown store. |
| 1435 | } |
| 1436 | |
| 1437 | return 0; |
| 1438 | } |
| 1439 | |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1440 | /// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG. |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1441 | /// |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1442 | /// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating |
| 1443 | /// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI |
| 1444 | /// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints. |
| 1445 | /// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of |
| 1446 | /// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction. |
| 1447 | /// |
| 1448 | /// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level: |
| 1449 | /// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in |
| 1450 | /// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and |
| 1451 | /// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs. |
| 1452 | /// |
| 1453 | /// |
| 1454 | /// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR: |
| 1455 | /// \code |
| 1456 | /// BB: |
| 1457 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1458 | /// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB |
| 1459 | /// ThenBB: |
| 1460 | /// %sub = sub %x, %y |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1461 | /// br label BB2 |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1462 | /// EndBB: |
| 1463 | /// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ] |
| 1464 | /// ... |
| 1465 | /// \endcode |
| 1466 | /// |
| 1467 | /// Into this IR: |
| 1468 | /// \code |
| 1469 | /// BB: |
| 1470 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1471 | /// %sub = sub %x, %y |
| 1472 | /// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub |
| 1473 | /// ... |
| 1474 | /// \endcode |
| 1475 | /// |
| 1476 | /// \returns true if the conditional block is removed. |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1477 | static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB) { |
Chandler Carruth | 9e62095 | 2013-01-24 08:22:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1478 | // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive. |
| 1479 | Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition(); |
| 1480 | if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond)) |
| 1481 | return false; |
| 1482 | |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1483 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
| 1484 | BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 | // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember |
| 1487 | // to swap the select operands later. |
| 1488 | bool Invert = false; |
| 1489 | if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) { |
| 1490 | assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?"); |
| 1491 | Invert = true; |
| 1492 | } |
| 1493 | assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block"); |
| 1494 | |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1495 | // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when |
| 1496 | // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically: |
| 1497 | // - They are defined in BB, and |
| 1498 | // - They have no side effects, and |
| 1499 | // - All of their uses are in CondBB. |
| 1500 | SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts; |
| 1501 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1502 | unsigned SpeculationCost = 0; |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1503 | Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = 0; |
| 1504 | StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = 0; |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1505 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(), |
| 1506 | BBE = llvm::prior(ThenBB->end()); |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1507 | BBI != BBE; ++BBI) { |
| 1508 | Instruction *I = BBI; |
| 1509 | // Skip debug info. |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1510 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 1511 | continue; |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1512 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1513 | // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the |
| 1514 | // terminator) for now. |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1515 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1516 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1517 | return false; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1518 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1519 | // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive. |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1520 | if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && |
| 1521 | !(HoistCondStores && |
| 1522 | (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB, |
| 1523 | EndBB)))) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1524 | return false; |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1525 | if (!SpeculatedStoreValue && |
| 1526 | ComputeSpeculationCost(I) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1527 | return false; |
| 1528 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1529 | // Store the store speculation candidate. |
| 1530 | if (SpeculatedStoreValue) |
| 1531 | SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I); |
| 1532 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1533 | // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1534 | // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1535 | // being sunk into the use block. |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1536 | for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1537 | i != e; ++i) { |
| 1538 | Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i); |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1539 | if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || |
| 1540 | OpI->mayHaveSideEffects()) |
| 1541 | continue; // Not a candidate for sinking. |
| 1542 | |
| 1543 | ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI]; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1544 | } |
| 1545 | } |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1546 | |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1547 | // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for |
| 1548 | // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing |
| 1549 | // and so iteration order isn't significant. |
| 1550 | for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I = |
| 1551 | SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end(); |
| 1552 | I != E; ++I) |
| 1553 | if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) { |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1554 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1555 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1556 | return false; |
| 1557 | } |
| 1558 | |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1559 | // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects. |
| 1560 | bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false; |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1561 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin(); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1562 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) { |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1563 | Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 1564 | Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1565 | |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1566 | // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf. |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1567 | // Skip PHIs which are trivial. |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1568 | if (ThenV == OrigV) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1569 | continue; |
| 1570 | |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1571 | HaveRewritablePHIs = true; |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1572 | ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV); |
| 1573 | ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV); |
| 1574 | if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1575 | continue; // Known safe and cheap. |
| 1576 | |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1577 | if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) || |
| 1578 | (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE))) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1579 | return false; |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1580 | unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE) : 0; |
| 1581 | unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE) : 0; |
| 1582 | if (OrigCost + ThenCost > 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1583 | return false; |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1584 | |
Chandler Carruth | 47d8f6d | 2013-01-24 12:05:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1585 | // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up |
| 1586 | // getting expanded into Instructions. |
| 1587 | // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1588 | // constant expression. |
| 1589 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1590 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1591 | return false; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1592 | } |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1593 | |
| 1594 | // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence |
| 1595 | // as well. |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1596 | if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue)) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1597 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1598 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1599 | // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert. |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1600 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";); |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1601 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1602 | // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store. |
| 1603 | if (SpeculatedStoreValue) { |
| 1604 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI); |
| 1605 | Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand(); |
| 1606 | Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue; |
| 1607 | if (Invert) |
| 1608 | std::swap(TrueV, FalseV); |
| 1609 | Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + |
| 1610 | "." + FalseV->getName()); |
| 1611 | SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S); |
| 1612 | } |
| 1613 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1614 | // Hoist the instructions. |
| 1615 | BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(), |
| 1616 | llvm::prior(ThenBB->end())); |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1617 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1618 | // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1619 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI); |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1620 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin(); |
| 1621 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) { |
| 1622 | unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
| 1623 | unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB); |
| 1624 | Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI); |
| 1625 | Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI); |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 | // Skip PHIs which are trivial. |
| 1628 | if (OrigV == ThenV) |
| 1629 | continue; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1630 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1631 | // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1632 | // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch |
| 1633 | // destinations were inverted. |
| 1634 | Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1635 | if (Invert) |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1636 | std::swap(TrueV, FalseV); |
| 1637 | Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, |
| 1638 | TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName()); |
| 1639 | PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V); |
| 1640 | PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V); |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1641 | } |
| 1642 | |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1643 | ++NumSpeculations; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1644 | return true; |
| 1645 | } |
| 1646 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1647 | /// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch |
| 1648 | /// across this block. |
| 1649 | static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) { |
| 1650 | BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1651 | unsigned Size = 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1652 | |
Devang Patel | 9200c89 | 2009-03-10 18:00:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1653 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) { |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1654 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 1655 | continue; |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1656 | if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's. |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1657 | ++Size; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1658 | |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1659 | // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1660 | // live outside of the current basic block. |
| 1661 | for (Value::use_iterator UI = BBI->use_begin(), E = BBI->use_end(); |
| 1662 | UI != E; ++UI) { |
| 1663 | Instruction *U = cast<Instruction>(*UI); |
| 1664 | if (U->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(U)) return false; |
| 1665 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1666 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1667 | // Looks ok, continue checking. |
| 1668 | } |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1669 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1670 | return true; |
| 1671 | } |
| 1672 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1673 | /// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value |
| 1674 | /// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are |
| 1675 | /// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their |
| 1676 | /// ultimate destination. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1677 | static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1678 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
| 1679 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()); |
Chris Lattner | 9c88d98 | 2005-09-19 23:57:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1680 | // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used |
| 1681 | // outside of the block. |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1682 | if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse()) |
| 1683 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1684 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1685 | // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI. |
| 1686 | if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) { |
Chris Lattner | 29874e0 | 2008-12-03 19:44:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1687 | FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1688 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1689 | } |
| 1690 | |
| 1691 | // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs. |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1692 | if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1693 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1694 | // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are |
| 1695 | // constants. |
Zhou Sheng | 6b6b6ef | 2007-01-11 12:24:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1696 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) { |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1697 | ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i)); |
| 1698 | if (CB == 0 || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1699 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1700 | // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to |
| 1701 | // branch to RealDest. |
| 1702 | BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i); |
| 1703 | BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1704 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1705 | if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops. |
Bill Wendling | 6a648b8 | 2011-06-04 09:42:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1706 | // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch. |
| 1707 | if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1708 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1709 | // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other |
| 1710 | // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new |
| 1711 | // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting |
| 1712 | // the edge we are about to create. |
| 1713 | BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 1714 | RealDest->getName()+".critedge", |
| 1715 | RealDest->getParent(), RealDest); |
| 1716 | BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1717 | |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1718 | // Update PHI nodes. |
| 1719 | AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1720 | |
| 1721 | // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these |
| 1722 | // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the |
| 1723 | // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB. |
| 1724 | BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin(); |
| 1725 | DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values. |
| 1726 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) { |
| 1727 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) { |
| 1728 | TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB); |
| 1729 | continue; |
| 1730 | } |
| 1731 | // Clone the instruction. |
| 1732 | Instruction *N = BBI->clone(); |
| 1733 | if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1734 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1735 | // Update operands due to translation. |
| 1736 | for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); |
| 1737 | i != e; ++i) { |
| 1738 | DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i); |
| 1739 | if (PI != TranslateMap.end()) |
| 1740 | *i = PI->second; |
| 1741 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1742 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1743 | // Check for trivial simplification. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1744 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, TD)) { |
| 1745 | TranslateMap[BBI] = V; |
| 1746 | delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1747 | } else { |
| 1748 | // Insert the new instruction into its new home. |
| 1749 | EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N); |
| 1750 | if (!BBI->use_empty()) |
| 1751 | TranslateMap[BBI] = N; |
| 1752 | } |
| 1753 | } |
| 1754 | |
| 1755 | // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch |
| 1756 | // to EdgeBB instead. |
| 1757 | TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator(); |
| 1758 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1759 | if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) { |
| 1760 | BB->removePredecessor(PredBB); |
| 1761 | PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB); |
| 1762 | } |
Bill Wendling | 6a648b8 | 2011-06-04 09:42:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1763 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1764 | // Recurse, simplifying any other constants. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1765 | return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, TD) | true; |
Zhou Sheng | 6b6b6ef | 2007-01-11 12:24:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1766 | } |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1767 | |
| 1768 | return false; |
| 1769 | } |
| 1770 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1771 | /// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry |
| 1772 | /// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1773 | static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1774 | // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if |
| 1775 | // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we |
| 1776 | // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which |
| 1777 | // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control |
| 1778 | // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up |
| 1779 | // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway. |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1780 | BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent(); |
| 1781 | BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse; |
| 1782 | Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse); |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1783 | if (!IfCond || |
| 1784 | // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially. |
| 1785 | isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond)) |
| 1786 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1787 | |
Chris Lattner | 822a879 | 2006-11-18 19:19:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1788 | // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select. |
| 1789 | // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block. |
| 1790 | // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target |
| 1791 | // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or |
| 1792 | // fewer PHI nodes in this block. |
| 1793 | unsigned NumPhis = 0; |
| 1794 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I) |
| 1795 | if (NumPhis > 2) |
| 1796 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1797 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1798 | // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select |
| 1799 | // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions |
| 1800 | // that need to be moved to the dominating block. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1801 | SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts; |
Peter Collingbourne | 57808b3 | 2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1802 | unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold, |
| 1803 | MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1804 | |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1805 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) { |
| 1806 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++); |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1807 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, TD)) { |
| 1808 | PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1809 | PN->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1810 | continue; |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1811 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1812 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1813 | if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts, |
| 1814 | MaxCostVal0) || |
| 1815 | !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts, |
| 1816 | MaxCostVal1)) |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1817 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1818 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1819 | |
Sylvestre Ledru | c8e41c5 | 2012-07-23 08:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1820 | // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1821 | // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all. |
| 1822 | PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()); |
| 1823 | if (PN == 0) return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1824 | |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1825 | // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can |
| 1826 | // often be turned into switches and other things. |
| 1827 | if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) && |
| 1828 | (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) || |
| 1829 | isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || |
| 1830 | isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond))) |
| 1831 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1832 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1833 | // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all |
| 1834 | // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If |
| 1835 | // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not |
| 1836 | // worth promoting to select instructions. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1837 | BasicBlock *DomBlock = 0; |
| 1838 | BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0); |
| 1839 | BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1); |
| 1840 | if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) { |
| 1841 | IfBlock1 = 0; |
| 1842 | } else { |
| 1843 | DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1); |
| 1844 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I) |
Devang Patel | 383d7ed | 2009-02-03 22:12:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1845 | if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1846 | // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote. |
| 1847 | // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control |
| 1848 | // flow, so the xform is not worth it. |
| 1849 | return false; |
| 1850 | } |
| 1851 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1852 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1853 | if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) { |
| 1854 | IfBlock2 = 0; |
| 1855 | } else { |
| 1856 | DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2); |
| 1857 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I) |
Devang Patel | 383d7ed | 2009-02-03 22:12:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1858 | if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1859 | // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote. |
| 1860 | // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control |
| 1861 | // flow, so the xform is not worth it. |
| 1862 | return false; |
| 1863 | } |
| 1864 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1865 | |
Chris Lattner | e0b18e5 | 2010-12-14 07:23:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1866 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: " |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1867 | << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1868 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1869 | // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests, |
| 1870 | // do all of the PHI's now. |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1871 | Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1872 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1873 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1874 | // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the |
| 1875 | // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1876 | if (IfBlock1) |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1877 | DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt, |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1878 | IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(), |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1879 | IfBlock1->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1880 | if (IfBlock2) |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1881 | DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt, |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1882 | IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(), |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1883 | IfBlock2->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1884 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1885 | while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { |
| 1886 | // Change the PHI node into a select instruction. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1887 | Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse); |
| 1888 | Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1889 | |
| 1890 | SelectInst *NV = |
Devang Patel | f60364d | 2011-05-18 18:16:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1891 | cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "")); |
Chris Lattner | 86cc423 | 2007-02-11 01:37:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1892 | PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV); |
| 1893 | NV->takeName(PN); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1894 | PN->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1895 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1896 | |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1897 | // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement |
| 1898 | // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to |
| 1899 | // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond. |
| 1900 | TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | f60364d | 2011-05-18 18:16:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1901 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI); |
| 1902 | Builder.CreateBr(BB); |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1903 | OldTI->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1904 | return true; |
| 1905 | } |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1906 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1907 | /// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes |
| 1908 | /// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return, |
| 1909 | /// introducing a select if the return values disagree. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1910 | static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI, |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1911 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1912 | assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch"); |
| 1913 | BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1914 | BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1); |
| 1915 | ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator()); |
| 1916 | ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1917 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1918 | // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty |
| 1919 | // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra |
| 1920 | // computation on one path or the other. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1921 | if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) |
Devang Patel | 2cc86a1 | 2009-02-05 00:30:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1922 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1923 | if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) |
Devang Patel | 2cc86a1 | 2009-02-05 00:30:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1924 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1925 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1926 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1927 | // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If |
| 1928 | // there is no return value for this function, just change the |
| 1929 | // branch into a return. |
| 1930 | if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) { |
| 1931 | TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
| 1932 | FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1933 | Builder.CreateRetVoid(); |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1934 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1935 | return true; |
| 1936 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1937 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1938 | // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are |
| 1939 | // so we can insert a new select instruction. |
| 1940 | Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue(); |
| 1941 | Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1942 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1943 | // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks. |
| 1944 | if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue)) |
| 1945 | if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc) |
| 1946 | TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent()); |
| 1947 | if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue)) |
| 1948 | if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc) |
| 1949 | FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1950 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1951 | // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to |
| 1952 | // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is |
| 1953 | // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping |
| 1954 | // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being |
| 1955 | // safe. |
| 1956 | if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue)) |
| 1957 | if (TCV->canTrap()) |
| 1958 | return false; |
| 1959 | if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue)) |
| 1960 | if (FCV->canTrap()) |
| 1961 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1962 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1963 | // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and |
| 1964 | // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG. |
| 1965 | TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
| 1966 | FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1967 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1968 | // Insert select instructions where needed. |
| 1969 | Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition(); |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1970 | if (TrueValue) { |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1971 | // Insert a select if the results differ. |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1972 | if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) { |
| 1973 | } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) { |
| 1974 | TrueValue = FalseValue; |
| 1975 | } else { |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1976 | TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, |
| 1977 | FalseValue, "retval"); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1978 | } |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1979 | } |
| 1980 | |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1981 | Value *RI = !TrueValue ? |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1982 | Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue); |
| 1983 | |
Daniel Dunbar | e317bcc | 2009-08-23 10:29:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1984 | (void) RI; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1985 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1986 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:" |
Chris Lattner | bdff548 | 2009-08-23 04:37:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1987 | << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI |
| 1988 | << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1989 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1990 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 1991 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1992 | return true; |
| 1993 | } |
| 1994 | |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1995 | /// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the |
| 1996 | /// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt |
| 1997 | /// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was |
| 1998 | /// found. |
| 1999 | static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI, |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2000 | uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) { |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2001 | assert(BI->isConditional() && |
| 2002 | "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?"); |
| 2003 | MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
Nick Lewycky | 9196848 | 2011-12-27 18:27:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2004 | if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false; |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2005 | ConstantInt *CITrue = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1)); |
| 2006 | ConstantInt *CIFalse = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2)); |
Nick Lewycky | 9196848 | 2011-12-27 18:27:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2007 | if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false; |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2008 | ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue(); |
| 2009 | ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue(); |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2010 | return true; |
| 2011 | } |
| 2012 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2013 | /// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available |
| 2014 | /// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed. |
| 2015 | /// |
Benjamin Kramer | 23d3622 | 2012-07-13 13:25:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2016 | static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) { |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2017 | if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst)) |
| 2018 | return false; |
| 2019 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) { |
| 2020 | Instruction *PBI = &*I; |
| 2021 | // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value. |
| 2022 | if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) { |
| 2023 | Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI); |
| 2024 | Inst->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2025 | return true; |
| 2026 | } |
| 2027 | } |
| 2028 | return false; |
| 2029 | } |
Nick Lewycky | 6c00c6a | 2012-01-25 09:43:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2030 | |
Chris Lattner | c8fbc34 | 2011-04-11 23:24:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2031 | /// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a |
| 2032 | /// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into |
| 2033 | /// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination. |
Dan Gohman | 4b35f83 | 2009-06-27 21:30:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2034 | bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI) { |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2035 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2036 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2037 | Instruction *Cond = 0; |
| 2038 | if (BI->isConditional()) |
| 2039 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 2040 | else { |
| 2041 | // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where |
| 2042 | // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's |
| 2043 | // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its |
| 2044 | // predecessor. |
| 2045 | if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 2046 | if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator())) |
| 2047 | if (PBI->isConditional() && |
| 2048 | (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) || |
| 2049 | BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) { |
| 2050 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); |
| 2051 | I != E; ) { |
| 2052 | Instruction *Curr = I++; |
| 2053 | if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) { |
| 2054 | Cond = Curr; |
| 2055 | break; |
| 2056 | } |
| 2057 | // Quit if we can't remove this instruction. |
| 2058 | if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB)) |
| 2059 | return false; |
| 2060 | } |
| 2061 | } |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | if (Cond == 0) |
| 2064 | return false; |
| 2065 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2066 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2067 | if (Cond == 0 || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) || |
| 2068 | Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse()) |
| 2069 | return false; |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2070 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2071 | // Only allow this if the condition is a simple instruction that can be |
| 2072 | // executed unconditionally. It must be in the same block as the branch, and |
| 2073 | // must be at the front of the block. |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2074 | BasicBlock::iterator FrontIt = BB->front(); |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2075 | |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2076 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2077 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt; |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2078 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2079 | // Allow a single instruction to be hoisted in addition to the compare |
| 2080 | // that feeds the branch. We later ensure that any values that _it_ uses |
| 2081 | // were also live in the predecessor, so that we don't unnecessarily create |
| 2082 | // register pressure or inhibit out-of-order execution. |
| 2083 | Instruction *BonusInst = 0; |
| 2084 | if (&*FrontIt != Cond && |
Owen Anderson | 2722dfa | 2010-07-15 16:38:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2085 | FrontIt->hasOneUse() && *FrontIt->use_begin() == Cond && |
Dan Gohman | f042660 | 2011-12-14 23:49:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2086 | isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(FrontIt)) { |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2087 | BonusInst = &*FrontIt; |
| 2088 | ++FrontIt; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2089 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2090 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 2091 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt; |
Devang Patel | 60d490c | 2011-04-07 23:11:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2092 | } |
| 2093 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2094 | // Only a single bonus inst is allowed. |
| 2095 | if (&*FrontIt != Cond) |
| 2096 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2097 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2098 | // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch. |
| 2099 | BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt; |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2100 | |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2101 | // Ingore dbg intrinsics. |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2102 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2103 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2104 | if (&*CondIt != BI) |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2105 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 6ff645b | 2009-01-19 23:03:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2106 | |
| 2107 | // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that |
| 2108 | // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression. |
| 2109 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0))) |
| 2110 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2111 | return false; |
| 2112 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1))) |
| 2113 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2114 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2115 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2116 | // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops. |
| 2117 | BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2118 | BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : 0; |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2119 | if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB) |
| 2120 | return false; |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2121 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2122 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { |
| 2123 | BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI; |
| 2124 | BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2125 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2126 | // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in |
| 2127 | // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both |
| 2128 | // blocks. |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2129 | SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs; |
| 2130 | if (PBI == 0 || PBI->isUnconditional() || |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2131 | (BI->isConditional() && |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2132 | !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) || |
| 2133 | (!BI->isConditional() && |
| 2134 | !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs))) |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2135 | continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2136 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2137 | // Determine if the two branches share a common destination. |
Axel Naumann | 3780ad8 | 2012-09-17 14:20:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2138 | Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd; |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2139 | bool InvertPredCond = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2140 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2141 | if (BI->isConditional()) { |
| 2142 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) |
| 2143 | Opc = Instruction::Or; |
| 2144 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) |
| 2145 | Opc = Instruction::And; |
| 2146 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) |
| 2147 | Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true; |
| 2148 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) |
| 2149 | Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true; |
| 2150 | else |
| 2151 | continue; |
| 2152 | } else { |
| 2153 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest) |
| 2154 | continue; |
| 2155 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2156 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2157 | // Ensure that any values used in the bonus instruction are also used |
| 2158 | // by the terminator of the predecessor. This means that those values |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2159 | // must already have been resolved, so we won't be inhibiting the |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2160 | // out-of-order core by speculating them earlier. |
| 2161 | if (BonusInst) { |
| 2162 | // Collect the values used by the bonus inst |
| 2163 | SmallPtrSet<Value*, 4> UsedValues; |
| 2164 | for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = BonusInst->op_begin(), |
| 2165 | OE = BonusInst->op_end(); OI != OE; ++OI) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2166 | Value *V = *OI; |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2167 | if (!isa<Constant>(V)) |
| 2168 | UsedValues.insert(V); |
| 2169 | } |
| 2170 | |
| 2171 | SmallVector<std::pair<Value*, unsigned>, 4> Worklist; |
| 2172 | Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(PBI->getOperand(0), 0)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2173 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2174 | // Walk up to four levels back up the use-def chain of the predecessor's |
| 2175 | // terminator to see if all those values were used. The choice of four |
| 2176 | // levels is arbitrary, to provide a compile-time-cost bound. |
| 2177 | while (!Worklist.empty()) { |
| 2178 | std::pair<Value*, unsigned> Pair = Worklist.back(); |
| 2179 | Worklist.pop_back(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2180 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2181 | if (Pair.second >= 4) continue; |
| 2182 | UsedValues.erase(Pair.first); |
| 2183 | if (UsedValues.empty()) break; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2184 | |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2185 | if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Pair.first)) { |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2186 | for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = I->op_begin(), OE = I->op_end(); |
| 2187 | OI != OE; ++OI) |
| 2188 | Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(OI->get(), Pair.second+1)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2189 | } |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2190 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2191 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2192 | if (!UsedValues.empty()) return false; |
| 2193 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2194 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2195 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2196 | IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2197 | |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2198 | // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now. |
| 2199 | if (InvertPredCond) { |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2200 | Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2201 | |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2202 | if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) { |
| 2203 | CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond); |
| 2204 | CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate()); |
| 2205 | } else { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2206 | NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2207 | PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not"); |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2208 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2209 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2210 | PBI->setCondition(NewCond); |
Nick Lewycky | c9a1aed | 2011-12-26 20:54:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2211 | PBI->swapSuccessors(); |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2212 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2213 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2214 | // If we have a bonus inst, clone it into the predecessor block. |
| 2215 | Instruction *NewBonus = 0; |
| 2216 | if (BonusInst) { |
| 2217 | NewBonus = BonusInst->clone(); |
| 2218 | PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonus); |
| 2219 | NewBonus->takeName(BonusInst); |
| 2220 | BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName()+".old"); |
| 2221 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2222 | |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2223 | // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the |
| 2224 | // two conditions together. |
Nick Lewycky | 6776064 | 2009-09-27 07:38:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2225 | Instruction *New = Cond->clone(); |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2226 | if (BonusInst) New->replaceUsesOfWith(BonusInst, NewBonus); |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2227 | PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New); |
| 2228 | New->takeName(Cond); |
| 2229 | Cond->setName(New->getName()+".old"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2230 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2231 | if (BI->isConditional()) { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2232 | Instruction *NewCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2233 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2234 | New, "or.cond")); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2235 | PBI->setCondition(NewCond); |
| 2236 | |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2237 | uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2238 | bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight, |
| 2239 | PredFalseWeight); |
| 2240 | bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight, |
| 2241 | SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2242 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights; |
| 2243 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2244 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2245 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2246 | // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest |
| 2247 | // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest |
| 2248 | //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI. |
| 2249 | NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight); |
| 2250 | //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI + |
| 2251 | // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI. |
| 2252 | // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits. |
| 2253 | // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic. |
| 2254 | NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + |
| 2255 | SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2256 | } |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2257 | AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB); |
| 2258 | PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest); |
| 2259 | } |
| 2260 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2261 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2262 | // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB |
| 2263 | // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest |
| 2264 | //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI + |
| 2265 | // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI. |
| 2266 | NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + |
| 2267 | SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight); |
| 2268 | //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI. |
| 2269 | NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2270 | } |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2271 | AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB); |
| 2272 | PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest); |
| 2273 | } |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2274 | if (NewWeights.size() == 2) { |
| 2275 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 2276 | FitWeights(NewWeights); |
| 2277 | |
| 2278 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end()); |
| 2279 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2280 | MDBuilder(BI->getContext()). |
| 2281 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2282 | } else |
| 2283 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, NULL); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2284 | } else { |
| 2285 | // Update PHI nodes in the common successors. |
| 2286 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) { |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2287 | ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>( |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2288 | PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent())); |
| 2289 | assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)); |
| 2290 | Instruction *MergedCond = 0; |
| 2291 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) { |
| 2292 | // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value) |
| 2293 | // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value) |
| 2294 | // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value |
| 2295 | Instruction *NotCond = |
| 2296 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), |
| 2297 | "not.cond")); |
| 2298 | MergedCond = |
| 2299 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, |
| 2300 | NotCond, New, |
| 2301 | "and.cond")); |
| 2302 | if (PBI_C->isOne()) |
| 2303 | MergedCond = |
| 2304 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or, |
| 2305 | PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, |
| 2306 | "or.cond")); |
| 2307 | } else { |
| 2308 | // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C) |
| 2309 | // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond) |
| 2310 | // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2311 | MergedCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2312 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, |
| 2313 | PBI->getCondition(), New, |
| 2314 | "and.cond")); |
| 2315 | if (PBI_C->isOne()) { |
| 2316 | Instruction *NotCond = |
| 2317 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), |
| 2318 | "not.cond")); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2319 | MergedCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2320 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or, |
| 2321 | NotCond, MergedCond, |
| 2322 | "or.cond")); |
| 2323 | } |
| 2324 | } |
| 2325 | // Update PHI Node. |
| 2326 | PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()), |
| 2327 | MergedCond); |
| 2328 | } |
| 2329 | // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional. |
| 2330 | BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI); |
| 2331 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI); |
| 2332 | PBI = New_PBI; |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2333 | } |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2334 | |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2335 | // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we |
| 2336 | // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's. |
| 2337 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2338 | // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock. |
| 2339 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) |
| 2340 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I)) |
| 2341 | I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2342 | |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2343 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2344 | } |
| 2345 | return false; |
| 2346 | } |
| 2347 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2348 | /// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a |
| 2349 | /// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know |
| 2350 | /// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the |
| 2351 | /// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI. |
| 2352 | static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) { |
| 2353 | assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional()); |
| 2354 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Dan Gohman | 4ae5126 | 2009-08-12 16:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2355 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2356 | // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2357 | // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2358 | // this conditional branch redundant. |
| 2359 | if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() && |
| 2360 | PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) { |
| 2361 | // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically |
| 2362 | // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially. |
| 2363 | if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) { |
| 2364 | // Turn this into a branch on constant. |
| 2365 | bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2366 | BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2367 | CondIsTrue)); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2368 | return true; // Nuke the branch on constant. |
| 2369 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2370 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2371 | // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges |
| 2372 | // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of |
| 2373 | // simplifycfg will thread the block. |
| 2374 | if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) { |
Jay Foad | d8b4fb4 | 2011-03-30 11:19:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2375 | pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2376 | PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Jay Foad | 3ecfc86 | 2011-03-30 11:28:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2377 | std::distance(PB, PE), |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2378 | BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", |
| 2379 | BB->begin()); |
Chris Lattner | eb388af | 2008-07-13 21:55:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2380 | // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only |
| 2381 | // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds. |
| 2382 | // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic. |
Jay Foad | d8b4fb4 | 2011-03-30 11:19:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2383 | for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) { |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2384 | BasicBlock *P = *PI; |
| 2385 | if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2386 | PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() && |
| 2387 | PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() && |
| 2388 | PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) { |
| 2389 | bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2390 | NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2391 | CondIsTrue), P); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2392 | } else { |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2393 | NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2394 | } |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2395 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2396 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2397 | BI->setCondition(NewPN); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2398 | return true; |
| 2399 | } |
| 2400 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2401 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2402 | // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any |
| 2403 | // predecessors is a conditional branch to one of our destinations, |
| 2404 | // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br. |
Zhou Sheng | a8d57fe | 2009-02-26 06:56:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2405 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); |
| 2406 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 2407 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 2408 | ++BBI; |
| 2409 | if (&*BBI != BI) |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2410 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 63bf29b | 2009-01-20 01:15:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2411 | |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2412 | |
Chris Lattner | 63bf29b | 2009-01-20 01:15:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2413 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition())) |
| 2414 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2415 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2416 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2417 | int PBIOp, BIOp; |
| 2418 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
| 2419 | PBIOp = BIOp = 0; |
| 2420 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
| 2421 | PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1; |
| 2422 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
| 2423 | PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0; |
| 2424 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
| 2425 | PBIOp = BIOp = 1; |
| 2426 | else |
| 2427 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2428 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2429 | // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch |
| 2430 | // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will |
| 2431 | // keep getting unwound. |
| 2432 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB) |
| 2433 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2434 | |
| 2435 | // Do not perform this transformation if it would require |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2436 | // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets |
| 2437 | // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization. |
| 2438 | BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2439 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2440 | unsigned NumPhis = 0; |
| 2441 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); |
| 2442 | isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) |
| 2443 | if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform. |
| 2444 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2445 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2446 | // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops. |
| 2447 | BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2448 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2449 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent() |
Chris Lattner | bdff548 | 2009-08-23 04:37:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2450 | << "AND: " << *BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2451 | |
| 2452 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2453 | // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional |
| 2454 | // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other |
| 2455 | // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop |
| 2456 | // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up |
| 2457 | // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is |
| 2458 | // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously |
| 2459 | // infinite loop with no cond branch. |
| 2460 | if (OtherDest == BB) { |
| 2461 | // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code, |
| 2462 | // or it won't matter if it's hot. :) |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2463 | BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 2464 | "infloop", BB->getParent()); |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2465 | BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock); |
| 2466 | OtherDest = InfLoopBlock; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2467 | } |
| 2468 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2469 | DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent()); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2470 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2471 | // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave |
| 2472 | // it alone, but modify PBI. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2473 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2474 | // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions. |
| 2475 | Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2476 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI); |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2477 | if (PBIOp) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2478 | PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not"); |
| 2479 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2480 | Value *BICond = BI->getCondition(); |
| 2481 | if (BIOp) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2482 | BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not"); |
| 2483 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2484 | // Merge the conditions. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2485 | Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2486 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2487 | // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests. |
| 2488 | PBI->setCondition(Cond); |
| 2489 | PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest); |
| 2490 | PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2491 | |
Manman Ren | 5665403 | 2012-09-17 21:30:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2492 | // Update branch weight for PBI. |
| 2493 | uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2494 | bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight, |
| 2495 | PredFalseWeight); |
| 2496 | bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight, |
| 2497 | SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2498 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2499 | uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight; |
| 2500 | uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight; |
| 2501 | uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight; |
| 2502 | uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2503 | // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal + |
| 2504 | // PredOther * SuccCommon. |
| 2505 | // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther. |
| 2506 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights; |
| 2507 | NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) + |
| 2508 | PredOther * SuccCommon); |
| 2509 | NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther); |
| 2510 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 2511 | FitWeights(NewWeights); |
| 2512 | |
| 2513 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end()); |
| 2514 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2515 | MDBuilder(BI->getContext()). |
| 2516 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2517 | } |
| 2518 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2519 | // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's |
| 2520 | // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2521 | AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2522 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2523 | // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to |
| 2524 | // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different |
| 2525 | // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make |
| 2526 | // them agree. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2527 | PHINode *PN; |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2528 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); |
| 2529 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) { |
| 2530 | Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 2531 | unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()); |
| 2532 | Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx); |
| 2533 | if (BIV != PBIV) { |
| 2534 | // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2535 | Value *NV = cast<SelectInst> |
| 2536 | (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux")); |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2537 | PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2538 | } |
| 2539 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2540 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2541 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent()); |
| 2542 | DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2543 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2544 | // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least |
| 2545 | // one fewer predecessor. |
| 2546 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2547 | } |
| 2548 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2549 | // SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a |
| 2550 | // branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false. |
| 2551 | // Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator. |
| 2552 | // Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to |
| 2553 | // non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable. |
| 2554 | static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond, |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2555 | BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB, |
| 2556 | uint32_t TrueWeight, |
| 2557 | uint32_t FalseWeight){ |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2558 | // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG. |
| 2559 | // First, figure out which successors to preserve. |
| 2560 | // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that |
| 2561 | // successor. |
| 2562 | BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB; |
| 2563 | BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : 0; |
| 2564 | |
| 2565 | // Then remove the rest. |
| 2566 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 2567 | BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I); |
| 2568 | // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge. |
| 2569 | if (Succ == KeepEdge1) |
| 2570 | KeepEdge1 = 0; |
| 2571 | else if (Succ == KeepEdge2) |
| 2572 | KeepEdge2 = 0; |
| 2573 | else |
| 2574 | Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent()); |
| 2575 | } |
| 2576 | |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2577 | IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm); |
| 2578 | Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2579 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2580 | // Insert an appropriate new terminator. |
| 2581 | if ((KeepEdge1 == 0) && (KeepEdge2 == 0)) { |
| 2582 | if (TrueBB == FalseBB) |
| 2583 | // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present. |
| 2584 | // Create an unconditional branch to it. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2585 | Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB); |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2586 | else { |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2587 | // We found both of the successors we were looking for. |
| 2588 | // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2589 | BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB); |
| 2590 | if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight) |
| 2591 | NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2592 | MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()). |
| 2593 | createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); |
| 2594 | } |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2595 | } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) { |
| 2596 | // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this |
| 2597 | // terminator must be unreachable. |
| 2598 | new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm); |
| 2599 | } else { |
| 2600 | // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't. |
| 2601 | // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found; |
| 2602 | // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable. |
| 2603 | if (KeepEdge1 == 0) |
| 2604 | // Only TrueBB was found. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2605 | Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB); |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2606 | else |
| 2607 | // Only FalseBB was found. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2608 | Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB); |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2609 | } |
| 2610 | |
| 2611 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm); |
| 2612 | return true; |
| 2613 | } |
| 2614 | |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2615 | // SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces |
| 2616 | // (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y |
| 2617 | // with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs, |
| 2618 | // unconditional otherwise. |
| 2619 | static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) { |
| 2620 | // Check for constant integer values in the select. |
| 2621 | ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue()); |
| 2622 | ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue()); |
| 2623 | if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal) |
| 2624 | return false; |
| 2625 | |
| 2626 | // Find the relevant condition and destinations. |
| 2627 | Value *Condition = Select->getCondition(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2628 | BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor(); |
| 2629 | BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor(); |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2630 | |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2631 | // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB. |
| 2632 | uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0; |
| 2633 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 2634 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 2635 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 2636 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 2637 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 2638 | TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal). |
| 2639 | getSuccessorIndex()]; |
| 2640 | FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal). |
| 2641 | getSuccessorIndex()]; |
| 2642 | } |
| 2643 | } |
| 2644 | |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2645 | // Perform the actual simplification. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2646 | return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, |
| 2647 | TrueWeight, FalseWeight); |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2648 | } |
| 2649 | |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2650 | // SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces |
| 2651 | // (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA), |
| 2652 | // blockaddress(@fn, BlockB))) |
| 2653 | // with |
| 2654 | // (br cond, BlockA, BlockB). |
| 2655 | static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) { |
| 2656 | // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses. |
| 2657 | BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue()); |
| 2658 | BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue()); |
| 2659 | if (!TBA || !FBA) |
| 2660 | return false; |
| 2661 | |
| 2662 | // Extract the actual blocks. |
| 2663 | BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock(); |
| 2664 | BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock(); |
| 2665 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2666 | // Perform the actual simplification. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2667 | return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, |
| 2668 | 0, 0); |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2669 | } |
| 2670 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2671 | /// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp |
| 2672 | /// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a |
| 2673 | /// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific |
| 2674 | /// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In |
| 2675 | /// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the |
| 2676 | /// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something |
| 2677 | /// like: |
| 2678 | /// |
| 2679 | /// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ] |
| 2680 | /// DEFAULT: |
| 2681 | /// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92 |
| 2682 | /// br label %end |
| 2683 | /// end: |
| 2684 | /// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ] |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2685 | /// |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2686 | /// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to |
| 2687 | /// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2688 | static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt( |
| 2689 | ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
| 2690 | const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2691 | BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent(); |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2692 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2693 | // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too |
| 2694 | // complex. |
| 2695 | if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false; |
| 2696 | |
| 2697 | Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0); |
| 2698 | ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2699 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2700 | // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on |
| 2701 | // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can |
| 2702 | // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things. |
| 2703 | BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor(); |
| 2704 | if (Pred == 0 || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2705 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2706 | SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()); |
| 2707 | if (SI->getCondition() != V) |
| 2708 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2709 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2710 | // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of |
| 2711 | // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction |
| 2712 | // away. |
| 2713 | if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) { |
| 2714 | ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB); |
| 2715 | assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value"); |
| 2716 | ICI->setOperand(0, VVal); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2717 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2718 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, TD)) { |
| 2719 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2720 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2721 | } |
| 2722 | // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2723 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2724 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2725 | |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2726 | // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're |
| 2727 | // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI |
| 2728 | // and zap it. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2729 | if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) { |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2730 | Value *V; |
| 2731 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 2732 | V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext()); |
| 2733 | else |
| 2734 | V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2735 | |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2736 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
| 2737 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2738 | // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2739 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2740 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2741 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2742 | // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in |
| 2743 | // the block. |
| 2744 | BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0); |
| 2745 | PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->use_back()); |
| 2746 | if (PHIUse == 0 || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() || |
| 2747 | isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse))) |
| 2748 | return false; |
| 2749 | |
| 2750 | // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets |
| 2751 | // true in the PHI. |
| 2752 | Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()); |
| 2753 | Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext()); |
| 2754 | |
| 2755 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 2756 | std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst); |
| 2757 | |
| 2758 | // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or |
| 2759 | // false depending on if it is EQ or NE. |
| 2760 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst); |
| 2761 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2762 | |
| 2763 | // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from |
| 2764 | // the switch to the merge point on the compared value. |
| 2765 | BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", |
| 2766 | BB->getParent(), BB); |
Manman Ren | b010277 | 2012-09-17 23:07:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2767 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 2768 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 2769 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 2770 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 2771 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 2772 | // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst". |
| 2773 | Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1; |
| 2774 | Weights.push_back(Weights[0]); |
| 2775 | |
| 2776 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 2777 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2778 | MDBuilder(SI->getContext()). |
| 2779 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2780 | } |
| 2781 | } |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2782 | SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2783 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2784 | // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry. |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2785 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB); |
| 2786 | Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2787 | Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2788 | PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB); |
| 2789 | return true; |
| 2790 | } |
| 2791 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2792 | /// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch. |
| 2793 | /// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and |
| 2794 | /// fold it into a switch instruction if so. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2795 | static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *TD, |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2796 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2797 | Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 2798 | if (Cond == 0) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2799 | |
| 2800 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2801 | // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction. |
| 2802 | // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of |
| 2803 | // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them. |
| 2804 | Value *CompVal = 0; |
| 2805 | std::vector<ConstantInt*> Values; |
| 2806 | bool TrueWhenEqual = true; |
| 2807 | Value *ExtraCase = 0; |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2808 | unsigned UsedICmps = 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2809 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2810 | if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2811 | CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, TD, true, |
| 2812 | UsedICmps); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2813 | } else if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2814 | CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, TD, false, |
| 2815 | UsedICmps); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2816 | TrueWhenEqual = false; |
| 2817 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2818 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2819 | // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail. |
| 2820 | if (CompVal == 0) return false; |
| 2821 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2822 | // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch. |
| 2823 | if (UsedICmps <= 1) |
| 2824 | return false; |
| 2825 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2826 | // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch |
| 2827 | // instruction can't handle, remove them now. |
| 2828 | array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate); |
| 2829 | Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2830 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2831 | // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the |
| 2832 | // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch. |
| 2833 | if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2834 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2835 | // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how |
| 2836 | // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it. |
| 2837 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2838 | // Figure out which block is which destination. |
| 2839 | BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1); |
| 2840 | BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
| 2841 | if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2842 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2843 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2844 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2845 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size() |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2846 | << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2847 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2848 | // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch |
| 2849 | // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block |
| 2850 | // right before the condbr to handle it. |
| 2851 | if (ExtraCase) { |
| 2852 | BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test"); |
| 2853 | // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block. |
| 2854 | TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2855 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI); |
| 2856 | |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2857 | if (TrueWhenEqual) |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2858 | Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB); |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2859 | else |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2860 | Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2861 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2862 | OldTI->eraseFromParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2863 | |
Chris Lattner | 97bd89e | 2010-12-13 05:34:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2864 | // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them |
| 2865 | // for the edge we just added. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2866 | AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2867 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2868 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase |
| 2869 | << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2870 | BB = NewBB; |
| 2871 | } |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2872 | |
| 2873 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2874 | // Convert pointer to int before we switch. |
| 2875 | if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) { |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2876 | assert(TD && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout"); |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2877 | CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal, |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2878 | TD->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getContext()), |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2879 | "magicptr"); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2880 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2881 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2882 | // Create the new switch instruction now. |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2883 | SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size()); |
Devang Patel | d80e8ed | 2011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2884 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2885 | // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction. |
| 2886 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 2887 | New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2888 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2889 | // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any |
| 2890 | // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to |
| 2891 | // the number of edges added. |
| 2892 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); |
| 2893 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 2894 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 2895 | Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 2896 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i) |
| 2897 | PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB); |
| 2898 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2899 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2900 | // Erase the old branch instruction. |
| 2901 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2902 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2903 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n'); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2904 | return true; |
| 2905 | } |
| 2906 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2907 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
| 2908 | // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught |
| 2909 | // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls. |
| 2910 | BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent(); |
| 2911 | LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI()); |
| 2912 | if (RI->getValue() != LPInst) |
| 2913 | // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that |
| 2914 | // caused control to branch here. |
| 2915 | return false; |
| 2916 | |
| 2917 | // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics. |
| 2918 | BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI; |
| 2919 | while (++I != E) |
| 2920 | if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 2921 | return false; |
| 2922 | |
| 2923 | // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block. |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2924 | bool InvokeRequiresTableEntry = false; |
| 2925 | bool Changed = false; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2926 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) { |
| 2927 | InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator()); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2928 | |
| 2929 | if (II->hasFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable)) { |
| 2930 | // Don't remove an `invoke' instruction if the ABI requires an entry into |
| 2931 | // the table. |
| 2932 | InvokeRequiresTableEntry = true; |
| 2933 | continue; |
| 2934 | } |
| 2935 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2936 | SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2937 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2938 | // Insert a call instruction before the invoke. |
| 2939 | CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II); |
| 2940 | Call->takeName(II); |
| 2941 | Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv()); |
| 2942 | Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes()); |
| 2943 | Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 | // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses |
| 2946 | // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even |
| 2947 | // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is |
| 2948 | // updated. |
| 2949 | II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call); |
| 2950 | BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent()); |
| 2951 | |
| 2952 | // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke. |
| 2953 | BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II); |
| 2954 | |
| 2955 | // Finally, delete the invoke instruction! |
| 2956 | II->eraseFromParent(); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2957 | Changed = true; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2958 | } |
| 2959 | |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2960 | if (!InvokeRequiresTableEntry) |
| 2961 | // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it. |
| 2962 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2963 | |
| 2964 | return Changed; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2965 | } |
| 2966 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2967 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2968 | BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent(); |
| 2969 | if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2970 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2971 | // Find predecessors that end with branches. |
| 2972 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds; |
| 2973 | SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds; |
| 2974 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { |
| 2975 | BasicBlock *P = *PI; |
| 2976 | TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator(); |
| 2977 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) { |
| 2978 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) |
| 2979 | UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P); |
| 2980 | else |
| 2981 | CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI); |
| 2982 | } |
| 2983 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2984 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2985 | // If we found some, do the transformation! |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2986 | if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2987 | while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) { |
| 2988 | BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val(); |
| 2989 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB |
| 2990 | << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred); |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2991 | (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2992 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2993 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2994 | // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now. |
| 2995 | if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB)) |
| 2996 | // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block. |
| 2997 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2998 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2999 | return true; |
| 3000 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3001 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3002 | // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return |
| 3003 | // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the |
| 3004 | // branch itself into a select/return pair. |
| 3005 | while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) { |
| 3006 | BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3007 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3008 | // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block. |
| 3009 | if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) && |
| 3010 | isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) && |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3011 | SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3012 | return true; |
| 3013 | } |
| 3014 | return false; |
| 3015 | } |
| 3016 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3017 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) { |
| 3018 | BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3019 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3020 | bool Changed = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3021 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3022 | // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can |
| 3023 | // be removed, do so. |
| 3024 | while (UI != BB->begin()) { |
| 3025 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI; |
| 3026 | --BBI; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3027 | // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause |
| 3028 | // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile |
| 3029 | // operations may have this effect. |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3030 | if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3031 | |
| 3032 | if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) { |
| 3033 | if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3034 | if (SI->isVolatile()) |
| 3035 | break; |
| 3036 | } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3037 | if (LI->isVolatile()) |
| 3038 | break; |
| 3039 | } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3040 | if (RMWI->isVolatile()) |
| 3041 | break; |
| 3042 | } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3043 | if (CXI->isVolatile()) |
| 3044 | break; |
| 3045 | } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) && |
| 3046 | !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3047 | break; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3048 | } |
Bill Wendling | 23b49ba | 2011-08-16 20:41:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3049 | // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it |
| 3050 | // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad, |
| 3051 | // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes, |
| 3052 | // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased. |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3053 | } |
| 3054 | |
Eli Friedman | 2adc5b6 | 2011-03-09 00:48:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3055 | // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead) |
| 3056 | if (!BBI->use_empty()) |
| 3057 | BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType())); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3058 | BBI->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3059 | Changed = true; |
| 3060 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3061 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3062 | // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander |
| 3063 | // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them. |
| 3064 | if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3065 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3066 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); |
| 3067 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) { |
| 3068 | TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3069 | IRBuilder<> Builder(TI); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3070 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 3071 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) { |
| 3072 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
| 3073 | new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI); |
| 3074 | TI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3075 | Changed = true; |
| 3076 | } |
| 3077 | } else { |
| 3078 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3079 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1)); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3080 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 3081 | } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3082 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0)); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3083 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 3084 | Changed = true; |
| 3085 | } |
| 3086 | } |
| 3087 | } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3088 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3089 | i != e; ++i) |
| 3090 | if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3091 | BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
| 3092 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 3093 | --i; --e; |
| 3094 | Changed = true; |
| 3095 | } |
| 3096 | // If the default value is unreachable, figure out the most popular |
| 3097 | // destination and make it the default. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3098 | if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) { |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3099 | std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> > Popularity; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3100 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3101 | i != e; ++i) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3102 | std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> &entry = |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3103 | Popularity[i.getCaseSuccessor()]; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3104 | if (entry.first == 0) { |
| 3105 | entry.first = 1; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3106 | entry.second = i.getCaseIndex(); |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3107 | } else { |
| 3108 | entry.first++; |
| 3109 | } |
| 3110 | } |
| 3111 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3112 | // Find the most popular block. |
| 3113 | unsigned MaxPop = 0; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3114 | unsigned MaxIndex = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3115 | BasicBlock *MaxBlock = 0; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3116 | for (std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> >::iterator |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3117 | I = Popularity.begin(), E = Popularity.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3118 | if (I->second.first > MaxPop || |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3119 | (I->second.first == MaxPop && MaxIndex > I->second.second)) { |
| 3120 | MaxPop = I->second.first; |
| 3121 | MaxIndex = I->second.second; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3122 | MaxBlock = I->first; |
| 3123 | } |
| 3124 | } |
| 3125 | if (MaxBlock) { |
| 3126 | // Make this the new default, allowing us to delete any explicit |
| 3127 | // edges to it. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3128 | SI->setDefaultDest(MaxBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3129 | Changed = true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3130 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3131 | // If MaxBlock has phinodes in it, remove MaxPop-1 entries from |
| 3132 | // it. |
| 3133 | if (isa<PHINode>(MaxBlock->begin())) |
| 3134 | for (unsigned i = 0; i != MaxPop-1; ++i) |
| 3135 | MaxBlock->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3136 | |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3137 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3138 | i != e; ++i) |
| 3139 | if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == MaxBlock) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3140 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 3141 | --i; --e; |
| 3142 | } |
| 3143 | } |
| 3144 | } |
| 3145 | } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) { |
| 3146 | if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) { |
| 3147 | // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good |
| 3148 | // place to note that the call does not throw though. |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3149 | BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3150 | II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3151 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3152 | // Insert the call now... |
| 3153 | SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3); |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3154 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
| 3155 | CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(), |
Jay Foad | a3efbb1 | 2011-07-15 08:37:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3156 | Args, II->getName()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3157 | CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv()); |
| 3158 | CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes()); |
| 3159 | // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead. |
| 3160 | II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI); |
| 3161 | delete II; |
| 3162 | Changed = true; |
| 3163 | } |
| 3164 | } |
| 3165 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3166 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3167 | // If this block is now dead, remove it. |
| 3168 | if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) && |
| 3169 | BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) { |
| 3170 | // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block. |
| 3171 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3172 | return true; |
| 3173 | } |
| 3174 | |
| 3175 | return Changed; |
| 3176 | } |
| 3177 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3178 | /// TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp - Turns a switch with that contains only a |
| 3179 | /// integer range comparison into a sub, an icmp and a branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3180 | static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3181 | assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3182 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3183 | // Make sure all cases point to the same destination and gather the values. |
| 3184 | SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> Cases; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3185 | SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3186 | Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
| 3187 | SwitchInst::CaseIt PrevI = I++; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3188 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); I != E; PrevI = I++) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3189 | if (PrevI.getCaseSuccessor() != I.getCaseSuccessor()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3190 | return false; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3191 | Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3192 | } |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3193 | assert(Cases.size() == SI->getNumCases() && "Not all cases gathered"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3194 | |
| 3195 | // Sort the case values, then check if they form a range we can transform. |
| 3196 | array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate); |
| 3197 | for (unsigned I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3198 | if (Cases[I-1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue()+1) |
| 3199 | return false; |
| 3200 | } |
| 3201 | |
| 3202 | Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(Cases.back()); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3203 | Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), SI->getNumCases()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3204 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3205 | Value *Sub = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3206 | if (!Offset->isNullValue()) |
Devang Patel | 1f5812b | 2011-05-19 00:13:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3207 | Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName()+".off"); |
Hans Wennborg | a121e24 | 2013-04-16 08:35:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3208 | Value *Cmp; |
| 3209 | // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor. |
| 3210 | if (NumCases->isNullValue() && SI->getNumCases() != 0) |
| 3211 | Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext()); |
| 3212 | else |
| 3213 | Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch"); |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3214 | BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr( |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3215 | Cmp, SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor(), SI->getDefaultDest()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3216 | |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3217 | // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch. |
| 3218 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 3219 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 3220 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 3221 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 3222 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 3223 | // Combine all weights for the cases to be the true weight of NewBI. |
| 3224 | // We assume that the sum of all weights for a Terminator can fit into 32 |
| 3225 | // bits. |
| 3226 | uint32_t NewTrueWeight = 0; |
| 3227 | for (unsigned I = 1, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) |
| 3228 | NewTrueWeight += (uint32_t)Weights[I]; |
| 3229 | NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 3230 | MDBuilder(SI->getContext()). |
| 3231 | createBranchWeights(NewTrueWeight, |
| 3232 | (uint32_t)Weights[0])); |
| 3233 | } |
| 3234 | } |
| 3235 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3236 | // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successor's PHI nodes. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3237 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor()->begin(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3238 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3239 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = SI->getNumCases()-1; I != E; ++I) |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3240 | cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent()); |
| 3241 | } |
| 3242 | SI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3243 | |
| 3244 | return true; |
| 3245 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3246 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3247 | /// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch |
| 3248 | /// and use it to remove dead cases. |
| 3249 | static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI) { |
| 3250 | Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3251 | unsigned Bits = cast<IntegerType>(Cond->getType())->getBitWidth(); |
| 3252 | APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0); |
Rafael Espindola | 26c8dcc | 2012-04-04 12:51:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3253 | ComputeMaskedBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3254 | |
| 3255 | // Gather dead cases. |
| 3256 | SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3257 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3258 | if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 || |
| 3259 | (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) { |
| 3260 | DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3261 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '" |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3262 | << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3263 | } |
| 3264 | } |
| 3265 | |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3266 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 3267 | bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 3268 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3269 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 3270 | HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()); |
| 3271 | } |
| 3272 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3273 | // Remove dead cases from the switch. |
| 3274 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3275 | SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3276 | assert(Case != SI->case_default() && |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3277 | "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming."); |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3278 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3279 | std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back()); |
| 3280 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 3281 | } |
| 3282 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3283 | // Prune unused values from PHI nodes. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3284 | Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3285 | SI->removeCase(Case); |
| 3286 | } |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3287 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3288 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 3289 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 3290 | MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()). |
| 3291 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 3292 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3293 | |
| 3294 | return !DeadCases.empty(); |
| 3295 | } |
| 3296 | |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3297 | /// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification |
| 3298 | /// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated |
| 3299 | /// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor |
| 3300 | /// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return |
| 3301 | /// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node. |
| 3302 | static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue, |
| 3303 | BasicBlock *BB, |
| 3304 | int *PhiIndex) { |
| 3305 | if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator()) |
| 3306 | return NULL; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification. |
| 3307 | if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 3308 | return NULL; // BB must be dominated by the switch. |
| 3309 | |
| 3310 | BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); |
| 3311 | if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional()) |
| 3312 | return NULL; // Terminator must be unconditional branch. |
| 3313 | |
| 3314 | BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0); |
| 3315 | |
| 3316 | BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); |
| 3317 | while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) { |
| 3318 | int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
| 3319 | assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?"); |
| 3320 | |
| 3321 | Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx); |
| 3322 | if (InValue != CaseValue) continue; |
| 3323 | |
| 3324 | *PhiIndex = Idx; |
| 3325 | return PHI; |
| 3326 | } |
| 3327 | |
| 3328 | return NULL; |
| 3329 | } |
| 3330 | |
| 3331 | /// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch |
| 3332 | /// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that |
| 3333 | /// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away. |
| 3334 | /// Returns true if a change is made. |
| 3335 | static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) { |
| 3336 | typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap; |
| 3337 | ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes; |
| 3338 | |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3339 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3340 | ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue(); |
| 3341 | BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor(); |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3342 | |
| 3343 | int PhiIndex; |
| 3344 | PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, |
| 3345 | &PhiIndex); |
| 3346 | if (!PHI) continue; |
| 3347 | |
| 3348 | ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex); |
| 3349 | } |
| 3350 | |
| 3351 | bool Changed = false; |
| 3352 | |
| 3353 | for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(), |
| 3354 | E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3355 | PHINode *Phi = I->first; |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame^] | 3356 | SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second; |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3357 | |
| 3358 | if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue; |
| 3359 | |
| 3360 | for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I) |
| 3361 | Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition()); |
| 3362 | Changed = true; |
| 3363 | } |
| 3364 | |
| 3365 | return Changed; |
| 3366 | } |
| 3367 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3368 | /// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle |
| 3369 | /// initializing an array of constants like C. |
Hans Wennborg | bf01582 | 2012-09-07 08:22:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3370 | static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3371 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) |
| 3372 | return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing(); |
| 3373 | |
| 3374 | return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || |
| 3375 | isa<ConstantInt>(C) || |
| 3376 | isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || |
| 3377 | isa<GlobalValue>(C) || |
| 3378 | isa<UndefValue>(C); |
| 3379 | } |
| 3380 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3381 | /// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3382 | /// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there. |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3383 | static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V, |
| 3384 | const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) { |
| 3385 | if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V)) |
| 3386 | return C; |
| 3387 | return ConstantPool.lookup(V); |
| 3388 | } |
| 3389 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3390 | /// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for |
| 3391 | /// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are |
| 3392 | /// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3393 | /// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise. |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3394 | static Constant *ConstantFold(Instruction *I, |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3395 | const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) { |
| 3396 | if (BinaryOperator *BO = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3397 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(BO->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3398 | if (!A) |
| 3399 | return 0; |
| 3400 | Constant *B = LookupConstant(BO->getOperand(1), ConstantPool); |
| 3401 | if (!B) |
| 3402 | return 0; |
| 3403 | return ConstantExpr::get(BO->getOpcode(), A, B); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3404 | } |
| 3405 | |
| 3406 | if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3407 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3408 | if (!A) |
| 3409 | return 0; |
| 3410 | Constant *B = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(1), ConstantPool); |
| 3411 | if (!B) |
| 3412 | return 0; |
| 3413 | return ConstantExpr::getCompare(Cmp->getPredicate(), A, B); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3414 | } |
| 3415 | |
| 3416 | if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3417 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool); |
| 3418 | if (!A) |
| 3419 | return 0; |
| 3420 | if (A->isAllOnesValue()) |
| 3421 | return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool); |
| 3422 | if (A->isNullValue()) |
| 3423 | return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool); |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3424 | return 0; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3425 | } |
| 3426 | |
| 3427 | if (CastInst *Cast = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3428 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3429 | if (!A) |
| 3430 | return 0; |
| 3431 | return ConstantExpr::getCast(Cast->getOpcode(), A, Cast->getDestTy()); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3432 | } |
| 3433 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3434 | return 0; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3435 | } |
| 3436 | |
| 3437 | /// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes |
| 3438 | /// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3439 | /// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3440 | /// case), of a switch instruction SI. |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame^] | 3441 | static bool |
| 3442 | GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, |
| 3443 | ConstantInt *CaseVal, |
| 3444 | BasicBlock *CaseDest, |
| 3445 | BasicBlock **CommonDest, |
| 3446 | SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode*,Constant*> > &Res) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3447 | // The block from which we enter the common destination. |
| 3448 | BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent(); |
| 3449 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3450 | // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through |
| 3451 | // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor. |
| 3452 | SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool; |
| 3453 | ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal)); |
| 3454 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E; |
| 3455 | ++I) { |
| 3456 | if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) { |
| 3457 | // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block. |
| 3458 | if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1) |
| 3459 | return false; |
| 3460 | Pred = CaseDest; |
| 3461 | CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0); |
| 3462 | } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
| 3463 | // Skip debug intrinsic. |
| 3464 | continue; |
| 3465 | } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool)) { |
| 3466 | // Instruction is side-effect free and constant. |
| 3467 | ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C)); |
| 3468 | } else { |
| 3469 | break; |
| 3470 | } |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3471 | } |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 | // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one. |
| 3474 | if (!*CommonDest) |
| 3475 | *CommonDest = CaseDest; |
| 3476 | // If the destination isn't the common one, abort. |
| 3477 | if (CaseDest != *CommonDest) |
| 3478 | return false; |
| 3479 | |
| 3480 | // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block. |
| 3481 | BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin(); |
| 3482 | while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) { |
| 3483 | int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred); |
| 3484 | if (Idx == -1) |
| 3485 | continue; |
| 3486 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3487 | Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), |
| 3488 | ConstantPool); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3489 | if (!ConstVal) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3490 | return false; |
| 3491 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3492 | // Note: If the constant comes from constant-propagating the case value |
| 3493 | // through the CaseDest basic block, it will be safe to remove the |
| 3494 | // instructions in that block. They cannot be used (except in the phi nodes |
| 3495 | // we visit) outside CaseDest, because that block does not dominate its |
| 3496 | // successor. If it did, we would not be in this phi node. |
| 3497 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3498 | // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support. |
| 3499 | if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal)) |
| 3500 | return false; |
| 3501 | |
| 3502 | Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal)); |
| 3503 | } |
| 3504 | |
| 3505 | return true; |
| 3506 | } |
| 3507 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3508 | namespace { |
| 3509 | /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used |
| 3510 | /// to replace a switch. |
| 3511 | class SwitchLookupTable { |
| 3512 | public: |
| 3513 | /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement |
| 3514 | /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the |
| 3515 | /// table. |
| 3516 | SwitchLookupTable(Module &M, |
| 3517 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3518 | ConstantInt *Offset, |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame^] | 3519 | const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3520 | Constant *DefaultValue, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3521 | const DataLayout *TD); |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3522 | |
| 3523 | /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at |
| 3524 | /// the position given by Index in the lookup table. |
| 3525 | Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
| 3526 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3527 | /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of |
| 3528 | /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3529 | static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3530 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3531 | const Type *ElementType); |
| 3532 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3533 | private: |
| 3534 | // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in |
| 3535 | // different ways. |
| 3536 | enum { |
| 3537 | // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to |
| 3538 | // store that single value and return it for each lookup. |
| 3539 | SingleValueKind, |
| 3540 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3541 | // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap |
| 3542 | // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by |
| 3543 | // shift and mask operations. |
| 3544 | BitMapKind, |
| 3545 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3546 | // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load |
| 3547 | // instructions from the table. |
| 3548 | ArrayKind |
| 3549 | } Kind; |
| 3550 | |
| 3551 | // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value. |
| 3552 | Constant *SingleValue; |
| 3553 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3554 | // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap. |
| 3555 | ConstantInt *BitMap; |
| 3556 | IntegerType *BitMapElementTy; |
| 3557 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3558 | // For ArrayKind, this is the array. |
| 3559 | GlobalVariable *Array; |
| 3560 | }; |
| 3561 | } |
| 3562 | |
| 3563 | SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M, |
| 3564 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3565 | ConstantInt *Offset, |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame^] | 3566 | const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3567 | Constant *DefaultValue, |
Duncan Sands | 7046561 | 2013-01-23 09:09:50 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3568 | const DataLayout *TD) |
| 3569 | : SingleValue(0), BitMap(0), BitMapElementTy(0), Array(0) { |
Hans Wennborg | 565df79 | 2012-09-26 11:07:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3570 | assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!"); |
| 3571 | assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!"); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3572 | |
| 3573 | // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3574 | SingleValue = Values.begin()->second; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3575 | |
| 3576 | // Build up the table contents. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3577 | SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize); |
| 3578 | for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3579 | ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first; |
| 3580 | Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second; |
| 3581 | assert(CaseRes->getType() == DefaultValue->getType()); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3582 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3583 | uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()) |
| 3584 | .getLimitedValue(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3585 | TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes; |
| 3586 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3587 | if (CaseRes != SingleValue) |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3588 | SingleValue = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3589 | } |
| 3590 | |
| 3591 | // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3592 | if (Values.size() < TableSize) { |
| 3593 | for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) { |
| 3594 | if (!TableContents[I]) |
| 3595 | TableContents[I] = DefaultValue; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3596 | } |
| 3597 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3598 | if (DefaultValue != SingleValue) |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3599 | SingleValue = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3600 | } |
| 3601 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3602 | // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store |
| 3603 | // that single value. |
| 3604 | if (SingleValue) { |
| 3605 | Kind = SingleValueKind; |
| 3606 | return; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3607 | } |
| 3608 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3609 | // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap. |
| 3610 | if (WouldFitInRegister(TD, TableSize, DefaultValue->getType())) { |
| 3611 | IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(DefaultValue->getType()); |
| 3612 | APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0); |
| 3613 | for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) { |
| 3614 | TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 64f27e7 | 2012-10-01 11:31:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3615 | // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero. |
| 3616 | if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) { |
| 3617 | ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]); |
| 3618 | TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth()); |
| 3619 | } |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3620 | } |
| 3621 | BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt); |
| 3622 | BitMapElementTy = IT; |
| 3623 | Kind = BitMapKind; |
| 3624 | ++NumBitMaps; |
| 3625 | return; |
| 3626 | } |
| 3627 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3628 | // Store the table in an array. |
| 3629 | ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(DefaultValue->getType(), TableSize); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3630 | Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents); |
| 3631 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3632 | Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true, |
| 3633 | GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, |
| 3634 | Initializer, |
| 3635 | "switch.table"); |
| 3636 | Array->setUnnamedAddr(true); |
| 3637 | Kind = ArrayKind; |
| 3638 | } |
| 3639 | |
| 3640 | Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
| 3641 | switch (Kind) { |
| 3642 | case SingleValueKind: |
| 3643 | return SingleValue; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3644 | case BitMapKind: { |
| 3645 | // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59). |
| 3646 | IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType(); |
| 3647 | |
| 3648 | // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap. |
| 3649 | // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so |
| 3650 | // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe. |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3651 | Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast"); |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3652 | |
| 3653 | // Multiply the shift amount by the element width. |
| 3654 | ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt, |
| 3655 | ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()), |
| 3656 | "switch.shiftamt"); |
| 3657 | |
| 3658 | // Shift down. |
| 3659 | Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, |
| 3660 | "switch.downshift"); |
| 3661 | // Mask off. |
| 3662 | return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, |
| 3663 | "switch.masked"); |
| 3664 | } |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3665 | case ArrayKind: { |
| 3666 | Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index }; |
| 3667 | Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices, |
| 3668 | "switch.gep"); |
| 3669 | return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load"); |
| 3670 | } |
| 3671 | } |
| 3672 | llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!"); |
| 3673 | } |
| 3674 | |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3675 | bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3676 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3677 | const Type *ElementType) { |
| 3678 | if (!TD) |
| 3679 | return false; |
| 3680 | const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType); |
| 3681 | if (!IT) |
| 3682 | return false; |
| 3683 | // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values |
| 3684 | // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type. |
Benjamin Kramer | 465251a | 2012-09-27 18:29:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3685 | |
| 3686 | // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width. |
| 3687 | if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth()) |
| 3688 | return false; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3689 | return TD->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth()); |
| 3690 | } |
| 3691 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3692 | /// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built |
Hans Wennborg | deb2e9c | 2013-06-04 11:22:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3693 | /// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3694 | /// types of the results. |
| 3695 | static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3696 | uint64_t TableSize, |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3697 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3698 | const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3699 | const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) { |
Hans Wennborg | 565df79 | 2012-09-26 11:07:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3700 | if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10) |
| 3701 | return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3702 | |
Chandler Carruth | 06ec721 | 2012-11-30 09:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3703 | bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true; |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3704 | bool HasIllegalType = false; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3705 | for (SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>::const_iterator I = ResultTypes.begin(), |
| 3706 | E = ResultTypes.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3707 | Type *Ty = I->second; |
Chandler Carruth | 66ea2f9 | 2012-11-30 09:34:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3708 | |
| 3709 | // Saturate this flag to true. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3710 | HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty); |
Chandler Carruth | 66ea2f9 | 2012-11-30 09:34:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3711 | |
| 3712 | // Saturate this flag to false. |
| 3713 | AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister && |
| 3714 | SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(TD, TableSize, Ty); |
| 3715 | |
| 3716 | // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with |
| 3717 | // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the |
| 3718 | // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map. |
| 3719 | if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister) |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3720 | break; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3721 | } |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3722 | |
Chandler Carruth | 06ec721 | 2012-11-30 09:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3723 | // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway. |
| 3724 | if (AllTablesFitInRegister) |
| 3725 | return true; |
| 3726 | |
| 3727 | // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types. |
| 3728 | if (HasIllegalType) |
| 3729 | return false; |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 | // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for |
| 3732 | // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase. |
| 3733 | // FIXME: Find the best cut-off. |
| 3734 | return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3735 | } |
| 3736 | |
| 3737 | /// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more |
| 3738 | /// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values, |
| 3739 | /// replace the switch with lookup tables. |
| 3740 | static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3741 | IRBuilder<> &Builder, |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3742 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
| 3743 | const DataLayout* TD) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3744 | assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?"); |
Hans Wennborg | 04d7d13 | 2012-10-30 11:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3745 | |
Hans Wennborg | b031996 | 2012-11-07 21:35:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3746 | // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3747 | if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables()) |
Hans Wennborg | 04d7d13 | 2012-10-30 11:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3748 | return false; |
| 3749 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3750 | // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could |
| 3751 | // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that. |
| 3752 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3753 | // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each |
| 3754 | // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big |
| 3755 | // string and lookup indices into that. |
| 3756 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3757 | // Ignore the switch if the number of cases is too small. |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3758 | // This is similar to the check when building jump tables in |
| 3759 | // SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase. |
| 3760 | // FIXME: Determine the best cut-off. |
| 3761 | if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) |
| 3762 | return false; |
| 3763 | |
| 3764 | // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the |
| 3765 | // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values. |
| 3766 | assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end()); |
| 3767 | SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin(); |
| 3768 | ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3769 | ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3770 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3771 | BasicBlock *CommonDest = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3772 | typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3773 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists; |
| 3774 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults; |
| 3775 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes; |
| 3776 | SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs; |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) { |
| 3779 | ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3780 | if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue())) |
| 3781 | MinCaseVal = CaseVal; |
| 3782 | if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue())) |
| 3783 | MaxCaseVal = CaseVal; |
| 3784 | |
| 3785 | // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value. |
| 3786 | typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy; |
| 3787 | ResultsTy Results; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3788 | if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, |
| 3789 | Results)) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3790 | return false; |
| 3791 | |
| 3792 | // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi. |
| 3793 | for (ResultsTy::iterator I = Results.begin(), E = Results.end(); I!=E; ++I) { |
| 3794 | if (!ResultLists.count(I->first)) |
| 3795 | PHIs.push_back(I->first); |
| 3796 | ResultLists[I->first].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, I->second)); |
| 3797 | } |
| 3798 | } |
| 3799 | |
| 3800 | // Get the resulting values for the default case. |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3801 | SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList; |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3802 | if (!GetCaseResults(SI, 0, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3803 | DefaultResultsList)) |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3804 | return false; |
| 3805 | for (size_t I = 0, E = DefaultResultsList.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3806 | PHINode *PHI = DefaultResultsList[I].first; |
| 3807 | Constant *Result = DefaultResultsList[I].second; |
| 3808 | DefaultResults[PHI] = Result; |
| 3809 | ResultTypes[PHI] = Result->getType(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3810 | } |
| 3811 | |
| 3812 | APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3813 | uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1; |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3814 | if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, TD, ResultTypes)) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3815 | return false; |
| 3816 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3817 | // Create the BB that does the lookups. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3818 | Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3819 | BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), |
| 3820 | "switch.lookup", |
| 3821 | CommonDest->getParent(), |
| 3822 | CommonDest); |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 | // Check whether the condition value is within the case range, and branch to |
| 3825 | // the new BB. |
| 3826 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI); |
| 3827 | Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, |
| 3828 | "switch.tableidx"); |
| 3829 | Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get( |
| 3830 | MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize)); |
| 3831 | Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest()); |
| 3832 | |
| 3833 | // Populate the BB that does the lookups. |
| 3834 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB); |
| 3835 | bool ReturnedEarly = false; |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3836 | for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3837 | PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I]; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3838 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3839 | SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultLists[PHI], |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3840 | DefaultResults[PHI], TD); |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3841 | |
| 3842 | Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3843 | |
Hans Wennborg | 57933e3 | 2012-09-19 14:24:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3844 | // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to |
| 3845 | // do that right here. |
| 3846 | if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->use_begin()) && |
| 3847 | *PHI->use_begin() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) { |
| 3848 | Builder.CreateRet(Result); |
| 3849 | ReturnedEarly = true; |
| 3850 | break; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3851 | } |
| 3852 | |
Hans Wennborg | 57933e3 | 2012-09-19 14:24:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3853 | PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3854 | } |
| 3855 | |
| 3856 | if (!ReturnedEarly) |
| 3857 | Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest); |
| 3858 | |
| 3859 | // Remove the switch. |
| 3860 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < SI->getNumSuccessors(); ++i) { |
| 3861 | BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i); |
| 3862 | if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest()) continue; |
| 3863 | Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
| 3864 | } |
| 3865 | SI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 | ++NumLookupTables; |
| 3868 | return true; |
| 3869 | } |
| 3870 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3871 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3872 | BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent(); |
| 3873 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3874 | if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) { |
| 3875 | // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value, |
| 3876 | // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch. |
| 3877 | if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 3878 | if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3879 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3880 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3881 | Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3882 | if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond)) |
| 3883 | if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3884 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3885 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3886 | // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block |
| 3887 | // away into any preds. |
| 3888 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); |
| 3889 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 3890 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 3891 | ++BBI; |
| 3892 | if (SI == &*BBI) |
| 3893 | if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3894 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3895 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3896 | |
| 3897 | // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3898 | if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3899 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3900 | |
| 3901 | // Remove unreachable cases. |
| 3902 | if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3903 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3904 | |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3905 | if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3906 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3907 | |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3908 | if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, TD)) |
| 3909 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3910 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3911 | return false; |
| 3912 | } |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) { |
| 3915 | BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent(); |
| 3916 | bool Changed = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3917 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3918 | // Eliminate redundant destinations. |
| 3919 | SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs; |
| 3920 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) { |
| 3921 | BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i); |
| 3922 | if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest)) { |
| 3923 | Dest->removePredecessor(BB); |
| 3924 | IBI->removeDestination(i); |
| 3925 | --i; --e; |
| 3926 | Changed = true; |
| 3927 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3928 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3929 | |
| 3930 | if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) { |
| 3931 | // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable. |
| 3932 | new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI); |
| 3933 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI); |
| 3934 | return true; |
| 3935 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3936 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3937 | if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) { |
| 3938 | // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch. |
| 3939 | BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI); |
| 3940 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI); |
| 3941 | return true; |
| 3942 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3943 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3944 | if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) { |
| 3945 | if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3946 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3947 | } |
| 3948 | return Changed; |
| 3949 | } |
| 3950 | |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3951 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){ |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3952 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3953 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3954 | if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI)) |
| 3955 | return true; |
| 3956 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3957 | // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block. |
Rafael Espindola | 77a2c37 | 2011-06-30 20:14:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3958 | BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime(); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3959 | if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() && |
| 3960 | TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB)) |
| 3961 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3962 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3963 | // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison |
| 3964 | // against a constant, try to simplify the block. |
| 3965 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) |
| 3966 | if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) { |
| 3967 | for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) |
| 3968 | ; |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3969 | if (I->isTerminator() && |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3970 | TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI, TD)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3971 | return true; |
| 3972 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3973 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3974 | // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor |
| 3975 | // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the |
| 3976 | // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value |
| 3977 | // for PHI nodes in common successor. |
| 3978 | if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3979 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3980 | return false; |
| 3981 | } |
| 3982 | |
| 3983 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3984 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3985 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3986 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3987 | // Conditional branch |
| 3988 | if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) { |
| 3989 | // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value, |
| 3990 | // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this |
| 3991 | // switch. |
| 3992 | if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3993 | if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3994 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3995 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3996 | // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists. |
| 3997 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 3998 | BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); |
| 3999 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 4000 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 4001 | ++I; |
| 4002 | if (&*I == BI) { |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4003 | if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4004 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4005 | } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){ |
| 4006 | ++I; |
| 4007 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 4008 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 4009 | ++I; |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4010 | if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4011 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4012 | } |
| 4013 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4014 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4015 | // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction. |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4016 | if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, TD, Builder)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4017 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4018 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4019 | // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor |
| 4020 | // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the |
| 4021 | // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination. |
| 4022 | if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4023 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4024 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4025 | // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable |
| 4026 | // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if |
| 4027 | // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we |
| 4028 | // can hoist it up to the branching block. |
| 4029 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
| 4030 | if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
Rafael Espindola | 216dde9 | 2011-05-19 02:26:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4031 | if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4032 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4033 | } else { |
| 4034 | // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally |
| 4035 | // execute Successor #0 if it branches to successor #1. |
| 4036 | TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator(); |
| 4037 | if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 && |
| 4038 | Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4039 | if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0))) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4040 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4041 | } |
| 4042 | } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
| 4043 | // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally |
| 4044 | // execute Successor #1 if it branches to successor #0. |
| 4045 | TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator(); |
| 4046 | if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 && |
| 4047 | Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4048 | if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1))) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4049 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4050 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4051 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4052 | // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control |
| 4053 | // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants. |
| 4054 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition())) |
| 4055 | if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent()) |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4056 | if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, TD)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4057 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4058 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4059 | // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches. |
| 4060 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) |
| 4061 | if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator())) |
| 4062 | if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional()) |
| 4063 | if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4064 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4065 | |
| 4066 | return false; |
| 4067 | } |
| 4068 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4069 | /// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior. |
| 4070 | static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) { |
| 4071 | Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V); |
| 4072 | if (!C) |
| 4073 | return false; |
| 4074 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 1e21db6 | 2012-10-04 16:11:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4075 | if (I->use_empty()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4076 | return false; |
| 4077 | |
| 4078 | if (C->isNullValue()) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 1e21db6 | 2012-10-04 16:11:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4079 | // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists |
| 4080 | User *Use = *I->use_begin(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4081 | |
| 4082 | // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter |
| 4083 | // control flow (eg. calls) |
| 4084 | for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i) |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4085 | if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4086 | return false; |
| 4087 | |
| 4088 | // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined |
| 4089 | if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use)) |
| 4090 | if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) |
| 4091 | return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP); |
| 4092 | |
| 4093 | // Look through bitcasts. |
| 4094 | if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use)) |
| 4095 | return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC); |
| 4096 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4097 | // Load from null is undefined. |
| 4098 | if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use)) |
Andrew Trick | 119003f | 2013-03-07 01:03:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4099 | if (!LI->isVolatile()) |
| 4100 | return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0; |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4101 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4102 | // Store to null is undefined. |
| 4103 | if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use)) |
Andrew Trick | 119003f | 2013-03-07 01:03:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4104 | if (!SI->isVolatile()) |
| 4105 | return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I; |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4106 | } |
| 4107 | return false; |
| 4108 | } |
| 4109 | |
| 4110 | /// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4111 | /// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here. |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4112 | static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) { |
| 4113 | for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin(); |
| 4114 | PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i) |
| 4115 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) |
| 4116 | if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) { |
| 4117 | TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator(); |
| 4118 | IRBuilder<> Builder(T); |
| 4119 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) { |
| 4120 | BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)); |
| 4121 | // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead |
| 4122 | // destination from conditional branches. |
| 4123 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) |
| 4124 | Builder.CreateUnreachable(); |
| 4125 | else |
| 4126 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : |
| 4127 | BI->getSuccessor(0)); |
| 4128 | BI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 4129 | return true; |
| 4130 | } |
| 4131 | // TODO: SwitchInst. |
| 4132 | } |
| 4133 | |
| 4134 | return false; |
| 4135 | } |
| 4136 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4137 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) { |
Chris Lattner | dc3602b | 2003-08-24 18:36:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4138 | bool Changed = false; |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4139 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4140 | assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!"); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4141 | assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!"); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4142 | |
Dan Gohman | e2c6d13 | 2010-08-14 00:29:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4143 | // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)... |
| 4144 | // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4145 | if ((pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) && |
| 4146 | BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) || |
Dan Gohman | e2c6d13 | 2010-08-14 00:29:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4147 | BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) { |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4148 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB); |
Chris Lattner | 71af9b0 | 2008-12-03 06:40:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4149 | DeleteDeadBlock(BB); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4150 | return true; |
| 4151 | } |
| 4152 | |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4153 | // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction |
| 4154 | // away... |
Frits van Bommel | 5649ba7 | 2011-05-22 16:24:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4155 | Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true); |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4156 | |
Dan Gohman | 2c63566 | 2009-10-30 22:39:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4157 | // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block. |
| 4158 | Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB); |
| 4159 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4160 | // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior. |
| 4161 | Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB); |
| 4162 | |
Chris Lattner | ddb97a2 | 2010-12-13 05:10:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4163 | // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct |
| 4164 | // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and |
| 4165 | // if there are no PHI nodes. |
| 4166 | // |
| 4167 | if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB)) |
| 4168 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4169 | |
Devang Patel | 3e410c6 | 2011-05-18 18:01:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4170 | IRBuilder<> Builder(BB); |
| 4171 | |
Dan Gohman | 882d87d | 2008-03-11 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4172 | // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can |
| 4173 | // eliminate it, do so now. |
| 4174 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) |
| 4175 | if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4176 | Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TD); |
Dan Gohman | 882d87d | 2008-03-11 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4177 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4178 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4179 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4180 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) { |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4181 | if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4182 | } else { |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4183 | if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4184 | } |
| 4185 | } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4186 | if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true; |
Bill Wendling | aa5abe8 | 2012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4187 | } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4188 | if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4189 | } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4190 | if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4191 | } else if (UnreachableInst *UI = |
| 4192 | dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4193 | if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4194 | } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = |
| 4195 | dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4196 | if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 19831ec | 2004-02-16 06:35:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4197 | } |
| 4198 | |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4199 | return Changed; |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4200 | } |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4201 | |
| 4202 | /// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For |
| 4203 | /// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it |
| 4204 | /// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization |
| 4205 | /// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made. |
| 4206 | /// |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4207 | bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
| 4208 | const DataLayout *TD) { |
| 4209 | return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, TD).run(BB); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4210 | } |